JP6544049B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a variable effect is started based on winning of a gaming ball in a starting opening. The fluctuation effect is started promptly (for example, within one second) after the winning if the winning is not held, and immediately after the ending of the fluctuation based on the winning immediately before the holding if the winning is held. For example, it is usually started within one second).

JP, 2009-050734, A

  However, in such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the player may have a sense of distrust if the instruction to start the fluctuation effect is delayed and the fluctuation effect is not started promptly.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from feeling distrust.

Gaming machine of the present invention to achieve this object, a viable discriminating means discriminating, and update means capable of updating a counter value in a predetermined range, based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, said counter an obtaining unit capable of obtaining a value, a storage unit the counter value information based on the counter values acquired from the acquisition means is stored, on the basis of the counter value information stored in said storage means shows a dynamic display form determining means capable of determining the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the discrimination result of said discriminating means, a specific determination result on said display means wherein when the identification information is displayed, has a privilege providing means capable of imparting favorable benefits to the player, and wherein the counter value acquired by the acquisition unit specific counter for Acquisition control means capable of controlling the acquisition means to acquire the counter value again when it is a value, and movement of the identification information in a state where the counter value information is stored in the storage means After the target display is ended, the specific effect performing means is capable of executing a specific effect when a predetermined period has elapsed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a determination unit capable of executing a determination, and update means capable of updating a counter value in a predetermined range, based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, to obtain the counter value an obtaining unit capable of a storage unit the counter value information based on the counter values acquired from the acquisition means is stored, on the basis of the counter value information stored in said storage means, said discrimination means and dynamic display form determining means capable of determining the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the judgment result, the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on said display means If but when it is displayed, has a privilege providing means capable of imparting favorable benefits to the player, and the counter value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific of the counter value, Acquisition control means capable of controlling the acquisition means to acquire the counter value again, and the dynamic display of the identification information is ended in a state where the counter value information is stored in the storage means Later, when a predetermined period has elapsed, it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect .

It I, there is an effect that can be suppressed that would not inspire distrust against the player.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment, and the big hit judgment value in a special symbol, (b) is a 1st in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, and (c) shows the correspondence of the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the notice effect table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot notice effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the notice effect selection table for a slippage. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement production selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice re-selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production command processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view of the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table in the second embodiment It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main reselection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the weight progress presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the presentation counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows notice production selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the re-acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed schematically the structure of the super reach selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram showing typically the contents of the super reach selection table for jackpots in a 5th embodiment, (d) is a super reach selection table for removal in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pseudo fluctuation supplementary production selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic of the content of the supplementary production selection table for jackpots in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown to, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the supplementary production selection table for deviation | shift in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation re-selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a drawing of a special symbol (first design) is made, and the ball passes through gate (also referred to as second entrance) 67. In the case, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a prize at the specified winning opening 65a, so a large number of balls also enter the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, the propriety determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is started Ru.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  When the jackpot A and jackpot B are reached, the special game state (16R jackpot) with 16 rounds is reached, and then the value added after the jackpot end is given. More specifically, in "big hit A", as added value after the big hit end, the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of special symbol during the period until after the big hit end until it becomes the next big hit (certain variation of special symbol) It shifts to the time saving state of a normal symbol while shifting to On the other hand, in the "big hit B", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times after the big hit ends as added value after the big hit end.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a definite variation state of the so-called special symbol (during a special symbol oddity), in other words, a special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal condition", which means that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. Indicates

  In the present embodiment, when a definite variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state (that is, after the end of the "big hit A"), the definite variation state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, after the end of the special game state until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times is given a probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and after the lottery of the special symbol is ended 10 times May be configured to be set to the low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is in a definite variation state is not limited to 10 times, and may be determined arbitrarily. Similarly, in the present embodiment, after the "big hit B" is finished, it is configured to be a time-short state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times. It is not limited and may be determined arbitrarily.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a 12.1 inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbol to which "0,2,4,6,8" which is an even number is added aligns is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out, etc.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the gate 67 is being executed, or after the fluctuation is ended. As the stop symbol of, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lighted To be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four maximum holding ball numbers like the first entrance 64, and may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, It may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (a). As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , And the variation pattern table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. Specifically, only "0" is defined as a jackpot determination value in a low probability state of a special symbol, and 10 jacks "0 to 9" as a jackpot determination value in a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol Judgment values are defined. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning combination matches one of the determination values defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A), the special symbol It is determined that the jackpot of.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is for each big hit type. It is defined in association with it. Specifically, “big hit A” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 63” of the value of the first hit type counter C2. Moreover, "big hit B" is matched and prescribed | regulated to the range whose value of the 1st per type | classification counter C2 is "64-127." In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, "5 to 20" is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “5 to 212” is defined as the determination value which is the hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second hit random number counter C4 value obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second hit random number table 202c are referred to, and a hit is made with the normal symbol. It is determined whether there is any.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 27). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 255 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 255) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when it matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127) And reaches a maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 127) and then return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-255. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first random number table for low probability It is stored (see FIG. 8A). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/256".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ((0 to 9)) See FIG. 8 (a)). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 256, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "10/256".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 63” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “64 to 127” is “jackpot B”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 127, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 125 to 127) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop design stops other than the front and back of reach reach Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "completely out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 115) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as “0 to 115” so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated The table of is selected, and "complete removal" becomes easy to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 125 to 127, and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 116 to 124, making it difficult to select "back and forth out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach". In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 101. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 102 to 124, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 125 to 127.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 256, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 9A) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided.

  Here, the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c). As shown in FIG. 9A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9C). And at least a deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9D).

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (b). FIG. 9B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, the variation pattern of normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 63” as the judgment value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and various types of super reach are included in the range of “64 to 223”. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “224 to 255”. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the variation pattern The jackpot is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 9C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 for out of alignment is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 101" in the low probability state of the special symbol, complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "102 to 127" (Set the front and back out of reach, non back and forth out of reach).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, either a short variation (7 seconds) in which the variation time is relatively short or a long variation (10 seconds) in which the variation time is relatively long is set. “0 to 127” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “128 to 255” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for out-of-reach reach, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) that fall outside the range of “0 to 191” with the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various types of super reach that fall outside the range of “192 to 254” (60 seconds), "255" is set to the various special reach (90 seconds) out of it.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the type of stop, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for removal Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 9D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery of the special symbol is out in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115” according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "116 to 127", the outreach (reach in front and back, reach other than back and forth) is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 255). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed either the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203 Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table (refer to FIG. 8 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the second random number set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit with normal symbol from low probability (general symbol It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 20”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 256 while the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 16, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/16".

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 212”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 208, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second collision random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the symbol is hit normally. In this case, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol), and the first ball inlet 64 is "one second x 2 times 'Opened. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the opening of the first ball entrance 64 Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but it is open. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 255), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 27).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags, counters, and the like. Here, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, an ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation It has at least a flag 203e, a time saving / medium counter 203f, a big hit flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol In addition to the above, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts yes or no, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the special information 1 of the RAM 233 as the winning information. The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning combination is predicted. In addition, this prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data indicates that the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) are vacant. Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, if you shift data from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area will be empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserved areas will be the same as in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 20 and S405 in FIG. 22). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to 4 times It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 24: No) ).

  The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol) of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal status (the low probability status of the special symbol) of the special symbol. The probability change flag 203e is set to ON when the initial value is set to OFF, and it is determined in the jackpot control processing that the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is reached (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started It is set (see S214 of FIG. 20).

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208) is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability change flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is on, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability change flag 203e is off, the drawing of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol, and when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol If the value of the time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203 f is set to 100 at the end of the big hit B (16R hour short / long hit) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is short in normal symbol variation processing (see S508, S514, and S519 in FIG. 23), and in the special symbol variation processing, 1 is subtracted each time the variation time passes. (See S217 in FIG. 20). In the normal symbol variation process, even if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, if the above-mentioned probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S508 in FIG. 23). , S514 and S519). As a result, after the jackpot A is finished, it is possible to keep the special symbol in a definite variation state until the next jackpot and the time-saving state of the regular symbol, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game with one goal to be the jackpot A, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The jackpot flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203g is a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON after the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1003 in FIG. 28). Also, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the jackpot flag 203g is referred to and it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, fluctuation type counter CS1, second random number counter C4 , And a storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 Stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the control program and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work area) where various flags, counters, and I / O values are stored. Have.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 27), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 26) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the sound output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, the effect random number generation IC 800 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10A, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 at least stores a variation pattern selection table 222 a and a notice effect selection table 222 b.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The notice effect selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting an aspect of the notice effect performed during the variable display. Here, the notice effect in the present embodiment specifically suggests the degree of expectation according to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Show the direction to play. One of three types of characters may be selected. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an old man character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

  In the boy character, the percentage selected when the special symbol lottery is out is higher than that of the other characters, but the percentage selected for the jackpot is lower than that of the other characters. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation of the big hit is low as compared with the case where another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the variable display.

  On the other hand, in the case of the girl character, the ratio selected when the special symbol lottery is out is lower compared to the other characters, while the ratio selected in the case of the jackpot is compared to the other characters. Get higher. Therefore, by displaying the girl character in the small area Ds2 during the variable display, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit.

  In addition, in the case of an old man character, it is configured such that the rate of selection is higher than that of a girl character, and the rate of selection is lower than that of a boy character. In addition, in the case of the jackpot, the rate of selection is higher than that of the boy's character, and the rate of selection is lower than that of the girl's character. This makes it possible for the player to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot as compared to when the boy's character is displayed. As described above, it is possible to predict the expectation of the jackpot from the announcement effect by varying the type of the announcement effect (displayed character) in accordance with whether or not to be the jackpot. That is, since the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted from the content of the notice effect before the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed. It can be (suppressed). The type of advance notice effect is not limited to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be set arbitrarily. For example, a notice effect may be performed to change the back image, or a notice effect may be performed to change the aspect (for example, the size, color, etc.) of the third symbol being changed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the notice effect selection table 222b, at least a jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 and a release notice effect selection table 222b2 are defined. The jackpot notice effect table 222b1 is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice effect to be executed in the variable display performed when the lottery of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the out-of-date notice effect selection table 222b2 is a special symbol It is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice production performed in the fluctuation production performed when the lottery is out.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11 (b), the jackpot notice effect selection table 222 b 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot notification effect table 222b1, an aspect of the notification effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number. Although the details will be described later, the effect random number is a random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numeric value (0 to 255) as an effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the notice effect A is associated with the range of “0 to 24” of the effect random number. The notice effect A is a notice effect of a mode in which the boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B), and as described above, in the case of the variable display against the jackpot, the boy character is selected. Because the rate of the jackpot is low, by selecting the notice effect A in the jackpot variation, it is possible to bring a sense of surprise to the jackpot despite the notice effect with a low degree of expectation. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The notice effect B is associated with the range of the value of the effect random number of “25 to 99”. The notice effect B is a notice effect of a mode in which a character of an old man is displayed, and as described above, the ratio to be selected in the case of the variable display with respect to the jackpot is configured higher than the notice effect A. For this reason, when the advance notice effect B is displayed, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, the notice effect C is associated with the range in which the value of the effect random number is “100 to 249”. The notice effect C is a notice effect of a mode in which the girl's character is displayed, and is a type of notice effect of the type in which the percentage selected in the case of the jackpot is the highest. Therefore, by displaying the notice effect C, it is possible to make the player more strongly expecting a jackpot.

  On the other hand, "re-selection" is associated with the range where the value of the effect random number is "250 to 255". The "re-selection" means to re-execute the selection of the notice effect. That is, when the value of the effect random number is in the range of "250 to 255", the type of the advance effect is not determined, and the effect random number is acquired again from the effect random number generation IC 800 (representation random number get). Then, the re-acquired effect random number and the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This “reselection” is repeatedly performed until the value of the effect random number becomes a value (0 to 249) corresponding to any of the notice effect types. That is, when the value of the effect random number obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is repeatedly performed.

  By associating reselection with the range of “250 to 255”, the advance notice effect is determined only when 250 random numbers for effect “0 to 249” are obtained. Therefore, the notice effect A is selected when any of 25 values of “0 to 24” is obtained out of 250 values of “0 to 249”, so the probability is 10% (25/25). 250). In addition, since the notice effect B is selected when one of the 75 values of "25 to 99" is obtained out of the 250 values of "0 to 249", the probability is 30% (75 / 250). In addition, since the notice effect C is selected when any of 150 values of “100 to 249” is obtained out of 250 values of “0 to 249”, the probability is 60% (150 / 250).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, 250 values among the 8-bit (256 ways) values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 are used for the selection of the advance effect. That is, the value of a good number (i.e., 250 pieces) of decimal numbers can be used for determining the advance effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that each preliminary announcement effect is selected to a good value (10%, 30%, 60%) (integrate the percentage of the probability). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each advance notice effect is selected. In addition, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, the release notice effect selection table 222b2 for removal will be described. Similarly to the above-described winning notice effect selection table 222b1, the releasing notice effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which an aspect of a notice effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, in the range of “0 to 149” of the value of the effect random number, the notice effect A is associated, and in the range of “150 to 224” of the value of the effect random number, The notice effect B is associated, and the notice effect C is associated with the range of “225 to 249”. Further, “re-selection” is associated with the range of “250 to 255” for the value of the effect random number, as in the jackpot for-prediction effect presentation selection table 222 b 1.

  Therefore, the notice effect A is selected when one of 150 values of “0 to 149” is obtained out of 250 values of “0 to 249”, so the probability of being selected is 60% ( 150/250). In addition, since the notice effect B is selected when any of 75 values of “150 to 224” is obtained out of 250 values of “0 to 249”, the probability is 30% (75 / 250). Further, since the advance effect C is selected when any of 25 values of “225 to 249” is obtained out of 250 values of “0 to 249”, the probability is 10% (25 / 250). Therefore, in the case of the disconnection, the notice effect A is most easily selected as the type of the notice effect, and the notice effect C is most hardly selected. By making a difference in the probability of being selected, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not to be a big hit from the type of the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, according to the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, in addition to the effect image (for example, variation effect image) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, another effect image When (for example, a preview effect image) is displayed, it is configured to select from the preview effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the preview effect to be displayed additionally. By defining the notice effect selection table 222b separately from the change pattern selection table 222a, the notice effect to be displayed additionally to the change effect can be easily selected. Temporarily, if the aspect of the fluctuation production including the classification of advance production is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the data amount of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will increase. For example, when there are 32 types of variation effects and there are 3 types of advance effect effects that can be added and displayed for each, 96 types (32 × 3) of variation effects of the variation pattern selection table 222a The type must be defined. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are separately prepared as in the present embodiment, 35 kinds (32 + 3) of the fluctuation effect and the notice effect type are provided. Since it is preferable, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be prevented (suppressed) from increasing.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 values) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating a value of 10 bits (1024 ways) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, 1000 values are used for the selection of advance presentation effects, and redrawing is performed when 24 values different from the 1000 values are acquired. It is also good. Then, the number of random values (decision values) may be associated with each effect with 10 being the smallest unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to convert percentages into integers, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand probability and easy to design. Also, for example, an IC with a smaller number of bits (for example, 7 bits) than 8 bits may be employed. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the preview effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be made an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand the probability and easy to design.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a notice reselection flag 223e, a notice reselection counter At least the memory area 223z is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1308 in FIG. 31). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1402 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1408 in FIG. 32). When the type-of-stop selection flag 223d is turned on, the type of stop is determined based on the type of stop (or the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot) extracted from the received command for stop type.

  The notice reselection flag 223 e is a flag indicating whether “reselection” has been determined from the notice effect selection table 222 b. If this notice reselection flag 223e is on, it means that "reselection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b (the notice effect is not determined), and if it is off, "reselect" is It means that it has not been determined (the advance presentation has been determined). The preliminary value reselection flag 223e has its initial value set to OFF, and in the preliminary treatment effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of preliminary effect effect, "reselect" is determined from the preliminary effect effect selection table 222b. If it is set to ON (see S1506 in FIG. 33). In addition, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), if any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) are determined, or if “reselect” is determined ten or more times in a row, it is set to off. (See S1613 in FIG. 34). When "re-selection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b by referring to the notice re-selection flag 223e, the notice effect is re-selected (re-lottery) in the notice re-selection process (see FIG. 34). Can be performed.

  The preliminary announcement reselection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times of the process of selecting the preliminary announcement effect type again (re-lottery). Here, the process of re-lottery of the notice effect is to obtain a new random value (determination value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the fact that "re-selection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b. It is a process of reselecting the type of preview effect, and is executed in the preview reselection process (see FIG. 34). In this embodiment, when the process of redrawing the type of the notice effect continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of redrawing the drawing is discontinued and the normal notice effect (the notice effects A to C) is It is configured to execute different specific preview effects (special preview effects). Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the re-lottery is continuously selected and the type of the notice effect is not determined. Therefore, any advance notice effect can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the advance notice effect.

  The preliminary value reselection counter 223f has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by one each time the preliminary reselection process (see FIG. 34) is executed to re-lottery the type of preliminary effect (see FIG. 34). S1607). Further, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), any notice effect (notice effects A to C) is determined or ten or more consecutive "reselects" are determined, and a specific notice effect ( It is initialized to 0 when the jackpot decision advance notice production and the jackpot expectation degree advance notice production) are set (see S1612 in FIG. 34).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S1216 in FIG. 30). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on in the startup processing (FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113 (see 1108 in FIG. 29: Yes), the power-off flag 223y is set to on for a certain period of time. It is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before (100 milliseconds) elapse, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and an elapsed time timer for counting the rendering time. doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. In addition, the clocking timer counts an elapsed time after the effect such as the fluctuation effect is started. Various controls (setting of operations of various kinds of goods, development of effects, etc.) are performed based on the elapsed time counted by the clock timer.

  Next, the details of the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The effect random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random number value) used for a predetermined determination (determination of the type of preview effect to be displayed) performed in the sound lamp control device 113. Since the effect random number generation IC 800 can randomly generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) each time, the determination result can also be made random. Therefore, since the advance notice effect to be displayed can be determined at random, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the advance notice effect to be displayed. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The effect random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generation unit for generating random values (random number values) within a range of 8 bits (0 to 255), and the random number values generated by the random number generation unit. And at least a random number storage unit. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates pulse signals at random time intervals, and measures the time interval of the pulse signals generated by the RPG to determine 8 bits (1 byte) The random number value is converted into a random number value, and stored in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit is, for example, a specification capable of generating a random number value of 200 megabytes per second (two random number values per 10 μs). That is, the random number value can be updated at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the process for determining the advance effect is executed. More specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 produces an effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30) when the "reselect" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b. A new random number value is acquired from the random number generation IC 800 and the re-lottery of the notice effect is performed. This re-lottery of the notice effect continues to be executed at 1 millisecond intervals as long as “re-selection” is selected from the notice effect selection table 222 b, so one random value is acquired in 1 millisecond during this period. On the other hand, since the random number generation unit is a specification capable of generating two random number values per 10 μs, even if “re-selection” is selected continuously, a new random number value is used every time the re-lottery of the notice effect is retaken Lottery (reselection) can be performed. Therefore, since the advance notice effect to be displayed can be determined at random, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the advance notice effect to be displayed. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The random number storage unit is a storage device of a first in first out (FIFO) system that stores the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit with a predetermined number (for example, 16) as an upper limit. The audio lamp control device 113 can read out the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it for determination of the type of the notice effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO type storage device, when the reading of the random number value is instructed from the audio lamp control device 113, the stored timing is the temporally oldest random number value as the audio lamp It outputs to the control device 113. Then, the read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. As a result, since the random number storage unit can output random number values generated at different timings every time the read out of the random number values is instructed from the audio lamp control device 113, the random number values should be made more random values. Can.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) properly.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing part of a boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the power is turned on, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 13 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when "the big hit of the special symbol", and in the case of "out of the special symbol" in FIG. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view for explaining the ranges of two types of back images and the back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 14 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage” while the back surface A corresponds to the “town stage”. Moreover, FIG. 15 is shown with respect to the back surface C corresponding to an "island stage."

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 14, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black as time passes, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.15 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.15 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of In addition, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. 13 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 13 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the resident video RAM 235 is used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. The initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface C displays the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 15 (b)-(c) and 15 (c)-(a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while displaying the images of FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15 (b) to 15 (c) and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 15 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 15 (c) to 15 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an effect timing storage area 233 i, a stored image data determination flag 233 j, a drawing target buffer flag 233 k, a back image change flag 233 w, a back image determination flag 233 x, a demonstration display flag 233 y, and a confirmation display flag 233 z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is now It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table “0000H” describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information specified at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 47 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 37B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 37 (b) (see S2009) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 47A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 47B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later (see FIG. 16) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2003), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 18), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The effect timing storage area 233i displays the timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying notice effects (notice effects A to C, big hit finalization notice effects, big hit expectation degree big notice effects) for each fluctuation pattern type, and special notice effects It is an area for storing the timing (value of the pointer 233f) to be caused. In this embodiment, when setting the advance notice effect or the special notice effect, the advance notice effect or the special notice effect is displayed at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i.

  Here, the method for setting the advance notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a notice effect data table defining the display contents for each type of notice effect for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the fluctuation display data table and the like. Then, when the display notice effect command for notifying the type of notice effect is notified from the audio lamp control device 113, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time. It synthesizes with the variable display data table which is set. At the time of combining, the display content defined in the notice effect data table is set for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, the display content after the start timing of the advance effect is defined for each elapsed time in the advance effect data table. By configuring in this manner, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared with the case where the addresses for all the variation times are prepared in the preliminary presentation effect data table.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) of the process is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 2801 in FIG. 43A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the rear surface image determination flag 233x sets a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command to ON (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233 y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S 3021 in FIG. 44), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B) And S2705 in FIG. 42)). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44), except for the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B) And S2705 in FIG. 42)). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 256, 128, 128, 256), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 To do (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the big hit data is set based on the big hit type (S212), and the value of the time saving counter 203f is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the probability change flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the process proceeds to S218. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the processing of S215, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) is executed, the processing branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time counter 203f is 1 If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation of the special symbol (S302). When it is determined in the process of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the special symbol (ie, the probability change flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301. On the basis of the value of and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a definite variation (that is, the definite variation flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value "0" stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first random number counter C1 coincides with the random number (ie, “0”) to be hit, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the big hit of the two types of special symbols (big hit A Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 63", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "64 to 127", the jackpot It is determined that it is B (16 R time short-time winning) (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 9A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the fluctuation time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 115", complete out-of-range is set, and if it is in the range of "116 to 127", out-of-reach reach Set the reach). On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability time. Set Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, the outreach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the time).

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 27). Be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), this processing ends, and returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406), and the present process is terminated to return to the timer interrupt process. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S501: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). In the process of S508, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is established.

  When it is determined in the process of S508 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not during the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, it is acquired by the processing of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,213 to 255", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (c)).

  If it is determined in the process of S508 that the time saving state of the normal diagram type is not set (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 21 to 255", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is the hit of the normal symbol (S512), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S512: Yes) The display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S514), and if the time shortening state of the normal symbol is (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the big hit of the special symbol (S515) ). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S515, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. The open period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the open frequency is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to the process of S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S517), and the processing shifts to the processing of S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521.

  In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the currently executed fluctuation display has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is not performed and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the processing of S523, the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S518.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S524). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 525), and this processing is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized part is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motored part opening / closing process (see S905) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) is performed next. Is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S516 or S517 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S524 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if there is a ball passing, the second hit is made. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S601: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603) : No), end this processing. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 Is stored in the area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 26, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If not stored (S805: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 813, S 814) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S813, S814), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S808). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S810, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S811), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 19) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) and the start winning process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then the jackpot effect is executed or the variable if the special symbol is in the jackpot state A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process. The details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S905). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 in the normal symbol variation process are finished.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) or the process of S309, the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S 907). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 Ends the fluctuation display and displays the stop symbol (the second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 in the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 23). (Lights up)

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909 ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described S901 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S 909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, the time until the execution timing of the next main process Within the time, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S910, S911).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both in the present embodiment, 255). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 25 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S908 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S901. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S901. Therefore, in the process at the time of power supply shutoff, in the process of initial setting (see S801 in FIG. 26), without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the processing of S215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), the jackpot flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and the present process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1004). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1004, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1004: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1007). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1008, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this processing ends. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1010: Yes), an ending command is set (S1011), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1010 that it is not the ending start timing (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1012). When it is determined in the process of S1012 that the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) is not reached (S1012: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1012 that the end timing is reached (S1012: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a jackpot A (S1013), and if it is a jackpot A (S1013: Yes) 203e is set to ON (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not A (i.e. the jackpot B) in the process of S1013 (S1013: No), 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1016. Transition.

  In the process of S1014 or the process of S1016 executed after the process of S1015 is finished, the jackpot flag 203g is set to OFF, and then the process is ended.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 29, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1217 is performed (see FIG. 30) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1102). As described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1217. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power is turned off in S1217. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S1103), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process moves to S1104. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1217 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the start of the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. .

  In the process of S1102, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure occurs and during the execution of the power-off process of S1217, The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined in the process of S1105 that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data ( S1106). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1217 is performed (see S1215 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is performed, the process of S1108 is performed at the moment when the power-up flag 223y is turned on, until the process of this time is started. This is a case where the power failure process has started after the power failure process of S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110). The permission is set (S1111), and the process shifts to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1108 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1104 to S1106 Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process is transferred to S1110, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110). Then (S1111), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1109 is that, when the process of S1108 is reached via the processes of S1104 to S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1104, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous processing of S1201 has been executed (S1201), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the process of S1202 to S1211. In the process of S1201, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1202 to S1211, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variable display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1212 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S1213 is executed in a short cycle to execute the command received by the command determination process. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1202). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1204). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1205 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1207 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1209, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1210 ends, “reselect” is determined at the time of the determination of the notice effect, so that a new random value (determination value) is acquired and the notice reselection process for reselecting the notice effect is executed. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the process of S1212. The details of the preliminary reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1212). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S1213 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1214 that the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S1214: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S1216), The disconnection process is executed (S1217). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1218), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215) If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the command determination processing (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1301). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1303), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1307). And when it determines with having received ball number command (S1307: Yes), the value contained in the received ball number command, ie, the value of special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (Number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). Further, in the process of S1308, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1308 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1308 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1307 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1307: No), it is next determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1309). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1309: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main processing. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the process of S1309 (S1309: No), it is next determined whether the number-of-rounds command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Then, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and the number of display rounds command corresponding to the extracted round number is set Then (S1313), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round number command has not been received (S1311: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1314). Then, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1315), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1314 that the ending command has not been received (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then (S1316), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variation display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1213). This variation display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (ie, off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so the process of S1407 is performed. Transition to On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, a preview rendering effect selection process for selecting a mode of preview rendering to be displayed in addition to the fluctuation pattern (variation display) is executed (S1406), and thereafter, the process shifts to the processing of S1407. The details of the advance presentation effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1407, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1407). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1407: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1408), and then the process of S1306 in the command determination process (see FIG. 31) In, the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1409). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1409 (S1410), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, control is performed so that the third symbol display device 81 performs stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the notice effect selection processing (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this preliminary announcement effect selection processing (S1406). The preview presentation effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed in addition to the fluctuation display (variation pattern). Are determined and notified to the display control apparatus 114.

  In the advance notice effect setting process (S1406), first, a effect random number value (determination value) to be used for determining the advance notice effect is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The acquired effect random number values are temporarily stored, for example, in a buffer area (effect random number buffer) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a big hit (S1502), and if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S1502: No), a notice effect selection table 222b2 for disconnection (see FIG. 11C). The advance notice effect is selected (decided) based on the effect random number value (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11C, if the value of the effect random number (effect counter) is “0 to 149”, “notice effect A” is determined as the type of advance effect, If the value is "150 to 224", "notice effect B" is determined, and if the value is "225 to 249", "notice effect C" is determined. On the other hand, if the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined. As described above, when “re-selection” is determined, a new random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, and the type of notice effect is reconfirmed. Make a decision (reselect).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, out of the 8-bit (256 ways) effect random number values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used to select the advance effect. That is, the value of a good number (i.e., 250 pieces) of decimal numbers can be used for determining the advance effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that each preliminary announcement effect is selected to a good value (10%, 30%, 60%) (integrate the percentage of probability). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each advance notice effect is selected. In addition, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the lottery result is a big hit (S1502: Yes), the big hit advance presentation selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effects stored in the effect random number buffer The advance notice effect is selected (decided) based on the random number value (effect counter value) (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11 (b), when the effect random number value (render counter value) is “0 to 24”, “notice effect A” as the type of notice effect Is determined, and if the value is "25 to 99", "notice effect B" is determined as the type of the notice effect, and if the value is "100 to 249", the type of the notice effect is " The notice effect C is determined. On the other hand, if the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined.

  In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the notice effect is "re-select" (S1505), and if the selection result is not "re-select" (S1505: No), the notice effect selected (decided) A display advance notice rendering command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of is set (S1507), and this processing ends.

  In the command output process (S1202) of the main process (refer to FIG. 30) stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and stored in the RAM 223, the notice advance effect command for display set here is stored. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 sets the display of the notice effect indicated by the notice effect command for display by receiving the notice effect command for display. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d. When combining, the display content defined in the notice effect data table is set for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, the display content after the start timing of the advance effect is defined for each elapsed time in the advance effect data table. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently compared to the case where the addresses for all the variation times are prepared in the advance notice data table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1505 that "reselection" has been determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this process is ended. By setting the notice reselection flag 223e to ON, it is possible to newly obtain a random number for effect and determine the type of notice effect again in a notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the advance notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this preliminary announcement reselection process (S1211). The preliminary announcement reselection process (S1211) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice reselection process (S1211), first, it is determined whether the notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). As described above, this preliminary reselection flag 223 e is a flag that is set to ON when “reselection” is determined when determining the type of preliminary production, and a new random value for presentation is obtained to make a preliminary announcement. It is a flag indicating whether it is necessary to reselect an effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the advance notice reselection flag 223e is off (S1601: No), this process is ended because it is not necessary to reselect the advance notice effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the advance notice reselection flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to reselect the advance notice effect (when determining the type of the previous notice effect, It means that "re-selection" is decided, and the type of the notice effect is not decided. Therefore, in this case, the effect random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S 1602), and then the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (for the variable display for setting the advance notice notifies the big hit) It is determined whether or not it is a variable display (S1603).

  If it is determined in the process of S1603 that the variable display for notifying a big hit is not (S1603: No), the out-of-the-box announcement effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and the effect random number value (value of effect counter) The advance notice effect is selected (decided) based on (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1603 that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S1603: Yes), a big hit notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and a random value for effect The type of advance notice effect is selected based on the counter value (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the process of S1606, it is determined whether the selection result of the advance presentation effect is reselection (S1606). If the selection result of the advance notice effect is not the reselection (S1606: No), the advance notice command is set based on the selection result of the advance notice effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  When “re-selection” is determined when determining (selecting) the type of preview effect (S1606: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the preview re-selection counter 223f (S1607), and then the re-selection counter It is determined whether the value of is 10 or more (S1608). If it is determined in the process of S1608 that the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more (S1608: Yes), the reselection of the notice effect is discontinued, and the specification different from the normal notice effect (notice effects A to C) The processing (S1609 to S1611) for setting the advance notice effect (big hit finalized notice effect, big hit expectation degree high notice effect) is executed. By stopping reselection when the number of consecutive reselections is 10 or more, “reselection” continues to be selected (decided) endlessly, and it is prevented that the type of the notice effect is not determined (suppressed) it can. Therefore, any advance notice effect can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the advance notice effect.

  A process (S1609) for setting a specific advance notice effect (big hit finalized notice effect, big hit expectation degree big notice effect) different from the normal advance notice effect (notice effect A to C) by terminating the reselection of the advance effect. In S1611), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (whether the variable display for setting the advance notice effect is the variable display for notifying a big hit) (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S1609: Yes), it indicates the decision of the big hit as a specific advance notice effect (big hit confirmed advance effect, big hit expectation degree big notice effect) A display advance notice effect command for notifying a notice effect is set (S1610), and the process proceeds to the process of S1612. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (it is out) (S1609: No), as a specific notice effect (big hit final notice effect, big hit expectation degree big notice effect) A display notice preparation command for notifying notice preparation indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the process of S1612.

  As described above, when “re-selection” is determined continuously a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific advance notice effect (big hit finalized notice effect, big hit expectation degree large) not specified in the advance effect selection table 222 b By setting the advance notice effect, it is possible to make the player think that an unusual advance notice effect is displayed, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the probability that "reselection" is determined ten times in a row becomes a very low probability such as 6/256 to the tenth power (about 1/2 K). For this reason, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player by displaying a specific advance notice effect (big hit decision advance effect, big hit expectation degree big advance effect).

  In the process of S1612 executed after the process of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), and the notice reselection flag 223e is set to OFF (S1613), and this process is performed. Finish. By performing reselection of the notice effect every one millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 30) by this notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), the type of the notice effect is determined without stopping other processes. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the trigger for terminating the reselection of the advance presentation effect is a case in which “reselection” continues ten times, but this is not a limitation. For example, the predetermined number of times “reselection” is selected may be set to a large number (for example, 20 times) or may be set to a small number (for example, 5 times). In addition, it is also possible to set an elapse of a predetermined time as a trigger (for example, 3 seconds after the first "reselection" is selected).

  In the present embodiment, when the reselection of the notice effect is ended, the specific notice effect (big hit final notice effect, big hit expectation degree big notice effect) is set, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Naturally, it may be set so as not to.

  In this embodiment, although it was comprised so that reselection might be performed in selection of advance production, it is not restricted to this. For example, as a matter of course, reselection may be performed in the selection of the effect mode of the effect (so-called, button press effect) displayed when the button is pressed.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S 1701), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1701) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1801). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1802, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1802, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1803). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1701 in FIG. 35) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1702 of FIG. 35) (S1805), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1701) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1802. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1801 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1801. And after repeating the process of S1802 multiple times including the process of S1803-S1805 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1703, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1704). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1704, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1705). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is made so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B). A determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and a simplified display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received through the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1705, interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1706, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2002) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2003) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2002), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43.

  In the display setting process (S2003), an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002) or the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2004). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2003) or the simple display setting processing (S2009), the image is configured While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2006). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2004), and transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2005) are determined. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2007, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2008) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2009) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2002) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2101: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2003) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2102), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2103).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2104), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2105), the process returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 39 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S2201).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2203), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2204), and both the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to OFF (S 2205). When the process of S2205 is completed, a pointer value (value of pointer 233f) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this processing ends.

  By storing the execution start timing of the notice effect and the special notice effect in the effect timing storage area 233i, the notice effect data table or the special notice effect data for the address after the stored timing (the value of the pointer 233f) It is possible to easily set the notice effect by adding the specified contents of the table.

  By performing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39), in the display setting process, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2204. From the display data table, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and simultaneously transferred by the process of S2202. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data is set in advance from the character ROM 234 in the set variable display data table. Normal To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2203, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2106), If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2107), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2301), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter which is updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2302).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to OFF (S2303), this termination type command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2004), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2303, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S 2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2302.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that there is no display stop type command (S2106: No), it is then determined whether there is a display preview effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2108), If there is a display preview rendering command (S2108: Yes), the preview rendering command processing for setting the preview rendering is executed (S2109), and the processing returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the advance presentation command process (S2109) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing advance notice command processing. The preview rendering command processing is processing for setting a preview rendering of a type notified by the display preview rendering command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the advance notice command processing, first, it is determined whether it is a timing at which the advance notice can be set (S2401). Here, the timing at which the advance notice effect can be set specifically means the case where the value of the pointer 233 f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233 i as the start timing of the advance notice effect. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern precedes the timing at which the preliminary rendering is started, it is determined that the preliminary rendering can be set in the process of S2401. In addition, in order to secure processing time which sets advance production, it may be determined whether it is earlier than the reference time in time by using a predetermined time before the timing to start the advance production as a reference time. . As a result, even when the processing time for setting the advance effect is long, the setting process of the advance effect is started by the above-mentioned reference time, so the completion process of the advance effect is completed by the timing of starting the advance effect. It can be done.

  If it is determined in the process of S2401 that it is the timing at which the advance notice effect can be set (S2401: Yes), the notice effect data table corresponding to the type of the notice effect notified by the notice effect command for display is determined. Data is added after the pointer position corresponding to the advance presentation timing of the display data table buffer 233d (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice effect can not be set (S2401: No), reselection is continuously determined in the notice effect selection process (S1406) of the sound lamp control device 113, etc. In this case, the timing at which the display advance notice rendering command is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which it is possible to set a special advance notice effect that executes the advance notice effect in a special display mode (S2403).

  Here, the timing at which the special preview effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the special preview effect. . That is, if the current variation pattern is earlier in time than the timing to start the special preview effect, it is determined that the special preview effect can be set in the process of S2403.

  In the process of S 2403, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the special notice effect can be set (S 2403: Yes), the special effect data table corresponding to the notice effect command for display is determined, and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position corresponding to the timing is set (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is an effect for executing the notice effect in a special display mode, and an effect to be executed from the start timing of the notice effect based on the notified notice effect command for display (for example, a boy at the center of the screen Is an effect (for example, an effect in which a boy is displayed in a reduced size at the lower left portion of the screen) performed in a special display mode different from the effect that is displayed.

  Even when the timing at which the notification advance presentation command for display has been notified exceeds the start timing of the notification effect by the processing of S2403 and S2404, a special effect different from the advance effect (notice effect A to C, specific notification effect) It is possible to display special preview effects in a variety of display modes. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display preview rendering command is delayed, it is possible to display the special preview rendering based on the notified display rendering command while avoiding overlapping display with other renderings. As a result, the player's interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2403 that the timing is not at which the special advance presentation effect can be set (S2403: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S2405. In the process of S2405, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2405), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By setting the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d by the notice effect command processing, the notice effect is easily set. be able to. In addition, when performing composition, for each address after the address (value of pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j, the display specified in the notice effect data table It is configured to add content. That is, the display content after the start timing of the advance effect is defined for each elapsed time in the advance effect data table. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently compared to the case where the addresses for all the variation times are prepared in the advance notice data table.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2108 that there is no display preview effect command (S2108: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2110: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. The opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 2501). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S2503). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2110 that there is no display opening command (S2110: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2112), and display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2112: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2605), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2112 that there is no display round number command (S2112: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2114). If there is an ending command for use (S2114: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2115), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2115) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 2702).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d by the process of S 2701, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 2703), and the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2114 that there is no display ending command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2116), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2117) will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2801) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing (S2004), when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 Then, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2116 that there is no rear image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2118), and it is determined whether there is an error command. For example (S2118: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2119) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2118 that there is no error command (S2118: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2120), and the process returns to S2101.

  In the process of S2101 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes ), The processing of S2102 to S2120 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2101 to S2120 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2008) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 39 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 39A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in the processing of S2201. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, details of the above-described display setting process (S2003) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing (S2004), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2004), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the finalized display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the opening command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2009) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 37B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image (FIG. 13 (b) or (c)) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2005) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the process of S3401, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2003) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3509).

  Then, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509: Yes), this means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3510), and provided for each back image type. Image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state among the back image determination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3509, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S3509: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3513 (S 3513: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2006) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2004), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 37B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the determination is performed again at the predetermined ratio (6/256) when the predetermined determination (the determination of the type of the notice effect to be displayed) is performed. (It is configured that the advance presentation is reselected). Further, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set such that the number of determination values for which determination results are derived without being reselected is the number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (preliminary effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero decimal place).

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute various kinds of lottery such as lottery of winning or not based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning hole, lottery of the aspect of display effect, and the like. In these lottery, since it becomes a lottery result different according to the random number value chosen, randomness can be given to a lottery result.

  However, since random numbers used for various types of lottery are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, the parameter of the lottery is generally in units of bits (power of 2) in the specification of the IC. For this reason, when the probability that each lottery result will be changed to a percentage, it is usual that a fraction (below the decimal point) occurs. That is, the percentage could not be integerized. For this reason, there existed a case where it became difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for every lottery result. Moreover, even when designing a gaming machine, the design may be inefficient because it may go through the process of once setting an integer percentage as a target of probability and calculating the number of random numbers closest to the set target. There was a risk of becoming

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the random value for which reselection is determined is distributed so that the parameter of the probability in the predetermined lottery is 250 which is a multiple of 50, the minimum is 2% (1 of the parameter). The probability of each lottery result can be distributed by a percentage of / 50). That is, since the percentage of the probability that each lottery result will be obtained can be easily converted into an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the lottery results can be intuitively understood. Further, by integerizing the percentage of the probability of each lottery result, it is possible to efficiently design the probability of each lottery result at the time of design.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 values) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating a value of 10 bits (1024 ways) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values which are multiples of 100 are used for the selection of the announcement effect, and when 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained It may be configured to perform. Then, for each effect, the number of random values (decision values) may be associated with 10 pieces (1/100 of the parameter number) as the minimum unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the percentage of the probability that each lottery result will be an integer value in 1% increments, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand the probability and easy to design. . Also, for example, an IC with a smaller number of bits (for example, 5 bits) than 8 bits may be employed. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the preview effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be made an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand the probability and easy to design. The percentage is not limited to integer conversion, but may be of the order of 0.1%.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number (so-called hardware random number) generated by the random number generation IC is used as the effect random number value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a matter of course, the value of a random number (so-called software random number) generated by software processing may be used.

  In this embodiment, when performing the lottery for the notice effect, the reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256), but the lottery for which the reselection can be determined is the lottery for the notice effect It is not limited to For example, the reselection may be determined at a predetermined ratio also in the lottery for selecting the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. Further, the lottery that can determine the reselection is not limited to the lottery performed in the voice lamp control device 113. For example, when drawing a lottery whether or not a special symbol is selected, or when drawing a jackpot type or the like, reselection may be selected at a predetermined ratio. By configuring in this manner, when the probability of becoming a jackpot, the probability of becoming each jackpot type, and the like are represented by percentages, it can be represented by an integer value. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with easy-to-understand specifications.

  In the present embodiment, when “re-selection” is determined ten times or more in the lottery for determining the announcement effect, the lottery for determining the announcement effect is ended, and a specific announcement effect different from normal ( Although the special preview effect is configured to be executed, the number of times to determine that the lottery is terminated is not limited to 10 times, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, by making the number more than 10 times, it is possible to more reliably determine the type (preceding effect A to C) of any one of the preview effects. Further, for example, by making the number less than 10 times, it is possible to terminate the lottery of the form of the notice effect in a smaller number of determinations even when "re-selection" is determined continuously, so the notice effect is determined. It can reduce the time taken to

  In this embodiment, the advance notice effect notified in advance from the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i. It is not something that can be done. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 may execute processing for determining a notice effect when it is determined that the start timing of the notice effect has come. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. By configuring in this way, the timing of notifying the type of the preview effect changes according to the number of times "re-selected" is determined in the process of selecting the preview effect, so the timing to start the preview effect can be varied. it can. That is, since the variation can be given not only to the type of advance notice effect but also to the start timing, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, in order to give variation to the timing at which the preliminary rendering is started, when "re-selection" is determined, processing of selecting the preliminary rendering again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed is executed. You may

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when drawing the type of advance notice effect in the voice lamp control device 113, “re-selection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). Further, the number of determination values corresponding to “re-selection” is set such that the number of determination values for which the determination result is derived without being re-selected is a good number (for example, a multiple of 50) . That is, when the probability that each determination result (preliminary effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero decimal place).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a part of the lottery (lottery of variation patterns) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the "reselection" is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). Configured. Thus, when the probability that each determination result (each variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage) in a lottery (lottery of variation patterns) in main controller 110, an integer percentage (zero decimal places) It becomes.

  In addition, when it becomes the lottery result which corresponds to “re-selection” continuously and the timing of notifying the fluctuation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is delayed, the specified effect (weight progress effect) in the sound lamp control device 113 Is configured to run. Since the lottery result is in an indefinite state while the "re-selection" is continuous, the fluctuation time is not determined. That is, the display of the fluctuation pattern can not be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (weight progress effect), the gaming machine operates normally even if the state of random selection continues indefinitely (“re-selection” continues many times). Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 are input / output of the main control device 110. The point of being electrically connected to the port 205, the point of partially changing the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 Partially changed, partially processed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the special drawing random number generation IC 900 for the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 And are electrically connected. The special drawing random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning. Further, the drawing random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number value) acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67. That is, in place of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, second collision random number counter C4) stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The counter value (random number value) used for various lottery (determination) executed in the main control unit 110 is acquired from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. In the second embodiment, the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment is eliminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, random number values (register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the common figure random number generation IC 901 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the special drawing random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (first random number register R1, first first type register R2, stop type selection register R3, variation type register RS1). There is. Each of these registers has the same role as the random number storage unit of the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment. That is, the random number value generated by the random number generation unit corresponding to each register is stored in each register, and when there is an instruction to read out the random number value, the random number value is output to the outside.

  The random number value (register value) updated in the first random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the register value of the first random number register R1 corresponds to the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (see FIG. 8A) defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). It is compared with the judgment value). The first random number register R1 stores random values in the range of 0-255. Also, the stored value is updated, for example, at a frequency of 2 times in 10 μs (a cycle of 200 kHz). The update frequency of the stored values of the other registers is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of the stored values is different.

  The register value updated in the first hit type register R2 is used to select the jackpot type of the special symbol. That is, the value of the first hit type register R2 corresponds to the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and a random number value (see FIG. 8B) defined in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). It is compared with the judgment value). The first hit type register R2 stores random values in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select the out type of stop in the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with the random number value (determination value) defined in the stop type selection table (not shown). The stop type of is determined (selected). The stop type selection register R3 stores random values in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). That is, the value of the variation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (determination in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C)) The type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined. A random value in the range of 0 to 255 is stored in the variation type selection register RS1. The random number value (register value) acquired from each register (first random number register R1, first collision type register R2, stop type selection register R3 and variation type register RS1) of the special drawing random number generation IC 900 is After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to a vacant area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. That is, the special drawing counter temporary storage area 203j is a first random number counter buffer, a first collision type counter buffer, a stop type selection counter buffer, and a fluctuation type counter buffer (FIG. 6) of the buffer 203y in the first embodiment. Storage area corresponding to

  In addition, the common drawing random number generation IC 901 is provided with one type of register (second random number register R4). The register value updated in the second random number register R4 is used to determine whether or not a symbol is hit normally. That is, the value stored in the second random number register R4 corresponds to the second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and the random number specified in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (decision value) to determine whether it is a normal symbol hit or not. The second random number register R4 stores random values in the range of 0-255.

  The random number value (register value) acquired from the second random number register R4 of the common drawing random number generation IC 901 is temporarily stored in the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k, and then the normal symbol holding ball storage area It is transferred to the vacant area 203b. That is, the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second random number counter buffer in the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, random numbers generated by the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 provided outside the main control device 110 perform various determinations performed in the main control device 110. It is configured to execute based on (hardware random number). With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and random number generation IC 901 for common drawing) in which random number values are updated (generated) at a frequency of twice per 10 μs (period of 200 kHz) But it is not limited to this. For example, when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC, a random number generation IC capable of updating (generating) random number values may be used. As a result, since the number of times the random number generation IC updates (generates) the random number value can be minimized, the power consumption can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and random number generation IC 901 for general drawing) capable of acquiring a random value which is a random value each time update (generation) is used. It is not limited to For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates the value one by one at short time intervals (for example, 1 μs), the timing for acquiring the value from the random number generation IC becomes irregular, so a substantially random value Naturally, it may be acquired.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52A, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i are added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, in place of the counter buffer 203y, a special drawing counter temporary storage area 203j and a common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

  The main reselection counter 203 h is a counter that indicates the number of times “reselection” is continuously selected in the predetermined determination (determination of the variation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type register RS1 and the variation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C). It is configured that “Reselect” is selected at a ratio of (6/256). When this "reselection" is selected, a random number value (value of the fluctuation type counter RS1) used to determine the fluctuation pattern, as in the case where "reselection" is selected at the time of selecting the advance notice effect in the first embodiment. Are newly obtained, and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined again based on the new random value. Here, since the fluctuation pattern can not be started unless the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is completed, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) needs to be determined quickly. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when "re-selection" is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without executing other processing, and the judgment of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is executed. Do. However, if "reselection" continues too many times continuously, the period when other processing (for example, start winning process, through gate passing process, etc.) is not executed becomes long, and for example, start winning can be detected. There is a risk that the passage of the through gate 67 can not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main reselection counter 203h counts the number of times the "reselection" is determined consecutively, and the "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times). After the other processing executed by the MPU 201 is executed once, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is acquired again and the processing of judging the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is executed again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute processing for rapidly determining the fluctuation pattern within a range that does not affect other processing.

  The initial value is set to 0 in the main reselection counter 203h, and "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). Each time the value is added, 1 is added to the value (see S333 in FIG. 56). In addition, “re-selection” is determined four or more times continuously, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) is interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d, which is a data table in which “reselection” is associated with a part of the random value (determination value), will be described. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to select a variation pattern as in the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, but the contents of its definition are modified from those in the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the present embodiment, “re-selection” is associated with a part of determination values (random number values). Further, by allocating the determination value (random number value) to “reselection”, the distribution of the determination value (random number value) with respect to the other determination results is changed.

  Specifically, variation patterns of various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 24” as determination values, and variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds) in the range of “25 to 174” Are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “175 to 249”. Then, "re-selection" is associated with the remaining "250 to 255" determination values. By setting the number of judgment values (random number values) for which “reselection” is determined to be six of “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach The total number of random numbers for determining 90 seconds can be 250 (0 to 249). Since 1% corresponds to 2.5 random numbers (decision value) (250/100), if a random number (decision value) is allocated with 5 (2%) as the minimum unit, the percentage of probability can be calculated. It can be an integer value.

  In this embodiment, 25 (5 × 5) determination values of “0 to 24” are allocated to various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “25 to 174” of various types of super reach (60 seconds). One hundred and fifty (five pieces × 30) determination values are assigned, and 75 (five pieces × 15) determination values of “175 to 249” are assigned to various special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability that a variety of normal reach is selected is 10% (2% × 5), the probability that a variety of super reach (60 seconds) is selected is 60% (2% × 30), and the variety of special reach (90 seconds) The probability of being selected is 30% (2% × 15). That is, random number values (decision values) are assigned such that the percentage of the rate at which each variation pattern is selected is an integer value. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of fractions (below the decimal point) in the percentage, and thus it is possible to provide a more easily understandable specification of the gaming machine. Further, even at the time of design, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probability of each determination result.

  The same applies to the out-of-order (normal) change pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53B) and the out-of-order (probable change) change pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 53C). "Re-selection" is associated with the range of "250 to 255". That is, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when 250 values (0 to 249) of the 256 random values (determination values) are obtained. Further, by setting the number of random numbers associated with each fluctuation pattern to be all multiples of 5, the percentage of the probability that each fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected is converted to an integer. This makes it possible to set the probability to a more easily understandable value regardless of whether it is a jackpot or a win.

  Referring back to FIG. 52 (a), the description will be continued. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” has been determined consecutively for a predetermined number of times (four times) or more in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time). If this main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined four or more times consecutively, and if it is off, the number of consecutive times of "reselection" is less than four. means. In the main reselection process (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59) If the selection flag 203i is on, processing (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) for acquiring a random value from the variation type register RS1 and determining a variation pattern (variation time) is executed.

  As described above, the special drawing counter temporary storage area 203 j and the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203 k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing each register value instead of the counter buffer 203 y (FIG. 51). reference). Each random number value (register value) acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special drawing counter temporary storage area 203j, and then transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The random number value (register value) acquired from the common drawing random number generation IC 901 is stored in the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k, and then transferred to the vacant area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

  The weight measurement counter 223g ends the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display (variation pattern) is finished in a state in which at least one fluctuation is suspended (the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 1 or more). It is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from The weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by one in the weight passage effect processing (see FIG. 63) until the next variable display is started after the stop command is received in a state where the number of balls held is 1 or more. . Since the weight passage effect processing (see FIG. 63) is executed every one millisecond in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113, the weight measurement counter 223g counts one every one millisecond. Is added one by one. In the present embodiment, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to (see S4205 in FIG. 63) in the weight lapse rendering process (see FIG. 63), and a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) after the previous fluctuation ends. A specific effect (weight passage effect) is configured to be executed when the next change pending is not started (the change pattern command is not output from the main controller 110) even after the passage of time (FIG. 63). See S4206).

  Here, when no variation pattern command is output from main controller 110 even after a predetermined period has elapsed, it takes time for processing for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in main controller 110. Etc. That is, in the process of determining the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 202d, "reselection" is continuously determined, and a new random value (determination value) is acquired from the fluctuation type register RS1 and defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. This is the case where the process of comparing with the determined value is repeated endlessly. If the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is not determined, the fluctuation pattern command can not be set from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so the previous fluctuation ends as “reselection” is repeated. It takes a long time until the next fluctuation starts. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to stand by until it receives the fluctuation pattern command, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 do not change in spite of that, there is a possibility that the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the previous fluctuation pattern (variation display), a specific effect (weight It is configured to execute the passage effect). As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, even if the next change presentation is not started. it can. In addition, even if the change pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect as the weight progress effect, the effect with less influence on the change time notified by the change pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately) Is executed. More specifically, for example, one or a plurality of stop symbols execute the sparkling effect until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the symbol shines) without a story or the like, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort even if the fluctuation pattern command is received during the effect and the fluctuation is started. Also, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the onset of fluctuation.

  The weight measurement flag 223 h is a flag indicating whether or not the previous fluctuation has ended in the state where the number of holding balls is 1 or more, and the fluctuation pattern command is not notified. That is, it indicates whether or not it is a period in which time measurement (counting) by the weight measurement counter 223g is performed. If this weight measurement flag 223h is on, it means that the previous fluctuation effect is finished and the next fluctuation pattern command is not notified, so the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed during this period. The value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated each time it is done (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223 h is off, the weight measurement counter 223 g is not updated because it is not in a period of waiting for the change pattern command to be notified from the main controller 110. The weight measurement flag 223 h is set to ON when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 and there is a holding ball (S 1335 in FIG. 62). Also, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to OFF (see S1332 in FIG. 62). The weight measurement counter 223g can be accurately updated by the weight measurement flag 223h.

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 60. First, timer interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. It is a periodic process to be executed.

  S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 19) in the first embodiment in the processes of S101, S106, S108, and S109, respectively, of the timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment. And the same processing as each processing of S109 is executed.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the start winning process (see FIG. 22), the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Instead of the above, special symbol variation processing 2 (S104), start winning processing 2 (S105), and through gate passage processing 2 (S107) are respectively executed. The details of each of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Furthermore, in the timer interrupt process 2 (refer to FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 is completed, the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time) (special symbol variation start process 2) or more predetermined times (four times) When the reselection is determined, the main reselection process, which is a process for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time), is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. Details of the main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) performs variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 is a process for controlling variable display of the third symbol and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) in the second embodiment, in each of S201 to S207 and S209 to S218, S201 to S207, S209 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of ~ S218 is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the variation is not in progress in the process of S202 (S202: No), a predetermined time from the previous stop display of the third symbol It is determined whether (one second) has elapsed (S231), and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S231 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S231: Yes), each process of S203 to S208 is executed. In addition, in the process of S208 in this embodiment, it replaces with the special symbol variation start process (refer FIG. 21) in 1st Embodiment, and performs special symbol variation start process 2 (S208). The details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 56, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, as in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Or lottery of "deletion of special symbol" (decision determination), while determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for

  Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in this second embodiment, in each of S301 to S311, each of S301 to S311 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment The same process is performed. Also, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the process of S307 or S309 is finished, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to (c)) in the process of S307 or S309; It is determined whether "reselection" has been determined (selected) based on the value of the variation type register RS1 (S331). When it is determined that "re-selection" is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the variation type register RS1 is newly acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S332), and the main reselection is performed. One is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334), and if the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting a fluctuation pattern Execute the process again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S334 that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is once ended, and the main reselection flag 203i is It is set to on (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203 h is initialized to 0 (S 336), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S331 that "reselection" has been determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. By the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), it is possible to determine the variation pattern and to repeat the reselection of the variation pattern when “re-selection” is determined. Here, since the fluctuation pattern can not be started unless the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is completed, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) needs to be determined quickly. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when "re-selection" is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without executing other processing, and the judgment of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is executed. Do. However, if "reselection" continues too many times continuously, the period when other processing (for example, start winning process, through gate passing process, etc.) is not executed becomes long, and for example, start winning can be detected. There is a risk that the passage of the through gate 67 can not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main reselection counter 203h counts the number of times the "reselection" is determined consecutively, and the "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times). After the other processing executed by the MPU 201 is executed once, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is acquired again and the processing of judging the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is executed again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute processing for rapidly determining the fluctuation pattern within a range that does not affect other processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the start winning process 2 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

  Of the start winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, in each process of S401 to S405, the same process as each process of S401 to S405 in the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

  In the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 in the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the first hit random number register R1 The respective values of the first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900, stored in the special drawing counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process proceeds to S402. .

  Further, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 is completed, each value of the special drawing counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (S432), the process ends. Various random number values (various register values) generated by the special drawing random number generation IC 900 can be acquired by the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57) and used for a special symbol lottery. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the through gate passing process 2 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. In the through gate passing process 2 (S107), as in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the ball passes. The normal symbol is a process for acquiring and holding a random number value used for a lottery of a hit.

  Of the through gate passing processes 2 (S107), in each of the processes of S601 to S604, the same processes as the processes of S601 to S604 in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. . In the through gate passing process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed the through gate 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), the value of the second random number register R4 is determined. The common drawing random number generation IC 901 is acquired and stored in the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k (S631), and the process proceeds to S602.

  Further, in through gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when the processing of S604 is completed, the value of the common drawing counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is set to the empty area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. After storing (S632), the process ends. By this through gate passage processing 2 (see FIG. 58), various random number values (various register values) generated by the common drawing random number generation IC 901 can be acquired and used for a lottery of a normal symbol. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main reselection processing (S131) is one of the timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, and the special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 56) In the process for determining the variation pattern, when “reselection” is determined four or more times consecutively, in the process for selecting the variation pattern based on the fourth and subsequent “reselection” determinations. is there.

  In this main reselection process (S131), it is judged first whether the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing 2. If the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the variation type register RS1 is acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900 (S4102), and the lottery result of the big hit and the value of the variation type register RS1 And the fluctuation pattern is determined based on (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is "re-selection" (S4104). If the determined fluctuation pattern is reselection (S4104: Yes), this processing ends. As described above, when “reselection” is determined from the variation pattern table 202 d, the processing is ended while the main reselection flag 203 i is kept in the on state, and the next timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54). In the main reselection process (S131) to be executed in step), the process of reselecting the variation pattern can be performed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the determined variation pattern is not reselection (S4104: No), a variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern determined in the process of S4103 (S4105) A stop type command is set based on the displayed display mode (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to off (S4107), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. Similar to the main processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is for executing main control of the game by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. It is a process.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915, each of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 in the first embodiment. The same process as the process is performed. Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes of S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are eliminated (deleted). In this embodiment, the random number value (register value) generated by the special drawing random number generation IC 900 is used for various lottery, and there is no need to generate the random value by software. Therefore, the various counter values are updated S902, The processes of S910 and S911 are eliminated. This process is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment except that these processes are eliminated. As described above, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, random numbers are generated in a software manner by using the random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and random number generation IC 901 for ordinary drawing). Processing (S902, S910, and S911) can be unnecessary and processing load can be reduced.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 61, main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. In the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218 in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61), the same processes as the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Also, in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, after the processing of S1201 to S1210 is executed, weight progress rendering processing described later is executed (S1231). Although the details will be described later, in this weight passage effect processing (S1231), a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed without the start of the next fluctuation after the previous fluctuation pattern (variation display) is finished. In this case, it is a process for setting a specific effect (weight passage effect).

  After execution of the weight passage effect (S1231), the command determination process 2 (S1212) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the processes after S1213 are executed. The details of the command determination process 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. The command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment determines the command received from the main control unit 110 in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the command is determined according to the type of command. It is a process of executing control.

  Of the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes of S1301 to S1308 and S1316, each of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same process as the process is performed.

  Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set to OFF. (S1332), this processing ends.

  Further, in the command determination process 2 in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1307 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333) ). If the stop command has been received (S1333: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a holding ball based on the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (S1334) and there is a holding ball (ie, special symbol holding) If it is determined that the value of the ball number counter 203c is 1 or more (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to OFF (S1335), and this processing is ended. Also, in the process of S1334, even when it is determined that there is no holding ball (S1334: No), this process is ended as it is.

  By setting the weight measurement flag 223h to ON, the holding ball ends the previous fluctuation, and counts (counts) the state in which the fluctuation pattern command has not been received despite the existence of the holding ball. be able to. In this embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (weight passage effect) is performed. Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even if the variation pattern command is not received, so the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation presentation is not started. The player can be made aware of the presence.

  If it is determined in the process of S1333 that the stop command has not been received (S1333: No), the process of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination process 2 is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the weight lapse rendering process (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this weight lapse effect processing (S1231). The weight passage effect process (S1231) is a process for setting a specific effect (weight passage effect) as described above.

  In this weight passage effect processing (S1231), first, it is determined whether the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201). When it is determined in the process of S4201 that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000. It is determined whether it is larger (S4203). If it is determined in the process of S4202 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that three seconds or more have elapsed since the previous fluctuation pattern (variation display) is completed. Do. That is, it means that the fluctuation pattern command can not be received despite the fact that a sufficient time for receiving the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 has elapsed, so some abnormality (for example, the main control device There is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 can not be normally received due to a failure 110 or a malfunction such as a harness (breakage or the like). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for notifying the player or the hall of the occurrence of an error is set (S4204), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000 or less (S4203: No), it is then determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 1050 (S4205). If it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the variation pattern command is in spite of the fact that 50 milliseconds have elapsed since the one-second symbol stop period has elapsed. Means not receiving. That is, when selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in main controller 110, "reselection" is continuously determined, and there is a high possibility that the determination of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display weight passage effect command for setting a display of a specific effect (weight passage effect) is set (S4206), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4205 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), this process is ended as it is.

  The display weight lapse effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 (S1202) Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the notification command for display, the display control device 114 displays a specific effect (weight passage effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, even if the change pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect as the weight progress effect, the effect with less influence on the change time notified by the change pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately) Is executed. More specifically, for example, one or a plurality of stop symbols execute the sparkling effect until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the symbol shines) without a story or the like, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort even if the fluctuation pattern command is received during the effect and the fluctuation is started. Also, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the onset of fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, despite the fact that the number of balls held is 1 or more, when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the end of the previous variation display, the weight passage effect is executed Although it was configured to do, it is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, after the end of the previous fluctuation display, even if the fluctuation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more, the weight passage effect is not executed. It is also good. More specifically, if it is known in advance that the next change is a change that results in a big hit, for example, by performing pre-reading of the determination result of the big hit, it is possible not to execute the weight passage effect. As a result, although the player temporarily feels uncomfortable that the variable display is not started although the number of holding balls is 1 or more, the player can start the variable display after the jackpot is given. Can be impressed as if it was a omen to be a big hit. As a result, the player's interest can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined ratio (6/256) in the predetermined determination (the determination for determining the variation pattern) of the main control device 110 that executes the main control regarding the game. Is configured to select “Reselect”. Further, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set such that the number of determination values for which determination results are derived without being reselected is the number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, it is set to be an integer percentage (zero decimal place). As a result, when the probability of each determination result is expressed as a percentage, the value is more easily understandable, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can easily understand the specifications and the like.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a variable rendering effect is started based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. This fluctuation effect is started promptly (for example, within one second) after the winning if the winning is not held, and immediately after the ending of the fluctuation based on the winning just before the holding when the winning is held. It is usually started (for example, within one second).

  However, if the variable effect is not started immediately after the end of the variable effect based on the winning after or immediately before the hold, since the game is not started even though the game is normally started, There is a possibility that the player may be distrusted.

  For example, in the present embodiment, in the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110, reselection is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256). For this reason, when "re-selection" is continuously determined, the fluctuation pattern is not determined during that time, so the period from the end of the fluctuation display of 1 to the start of the next fluctuation display is long The problem described above occurs.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern command is notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the end of the previous variation display despite the fact that the number of holding balls is 1 or more. When not being performed, it is configured to execute a specific effect (weight passage effect). Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even if the variation pattern command is not received, so the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation presentation is not started. The player can be made aware of the presence. In addition, even if the change pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect as the weight progress effect, the effect with less influence on the change time notified by the change pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately) Is executed. More specifically, for example, one or a plurality of stop symbols execute the sparkling effect until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the symbol shines) without a story or the like, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort even if the fluctuation pattern command is received during the effect and the fluctuation is started. Also, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the onset of fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more, a specific effect (weight passage effect effect) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When "re-selection" continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as a lottery result of the variation pattern, it may be configured as a matter of course to execute a specific effect (weight passage effect effect).

  In this embodiment, although it was comprised so that weight progress presentation (effect that a design shines) might be performed when 1050 milliseconds have passed since the last fluctuation | variation stop, it is not restricted to this. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern command is not received, the fluctuation of the symbol may be started. As a result, since the next change is started 1050 milliseconds at the latest after the previous symbol stop, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the symbol stop from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind without feeling discomfort.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above is configured to acquire one random number from the effect random number generation IC 800 at the time of executing the lottery, when the lottery is performed. The

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values are obtained in advance from the effect random number generation IC 800 and stored in the RAM 223, and a preview effect is produced using the stored random number values. It is comprised so that a lottery (decision) may be performed. In addition, when acquiring the random number value in advance, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a random number value (i.e., a random number value in the range of "250 to 255") for which "re-lottery" is obtained. Is configured to be stored in the RAM 223 only random number values for which is not determined (that is, random value values in the range of “0 to 249”). That is, the value corresponding to the "re-lottery" is discarded without being stored in the RAM 223. Thereby, when the lottery (determination) process of the notice effect is actually executed, the "re-lottery" is not determined, so that the continuation of the "re-lottery" delays the decision of the notice effect. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 for measuring the current time, and the audio lamp control The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment It is a point. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 can clock the current time. The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the time clocked by the RTC 292. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, random numbers predetermined in the RAM 223 are produced when the power is turned on (when a predetermined number (100) of random numbers are not stored in the RAM 223). It is configured to read out from the counter initial value table 222c and store it. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random number values stored in the RAM 223. In the present embodiment, random numbers of different combinations are set as initial values according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292. As a result, while the initial value of the random number is quickly determined, the random value set as the initial value can be made more random.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 65A, in the ROM 222 of this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, a presentation counter initial value table 222c is provided. The effect counter initial value table 222 c is a data table used to select the initial value of the random number value referred to when selecting the advance effect. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random numbers selectable as initial values are defined. Further, all the random number values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values in the range of “0 to 249”. That is, the random value set as the initial value is a random value other than the range of random values for which “reselection” is determined (that is, “250 to 255”). As a result, when selecting the type of the preview effect, the type can be selected without selecting “re-selection”, so the processing time related to the determination (selection) of the preview effect can be shortened.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the effect counter initial value table 222 c is referred to and an initial value is selected. The selected initial value is stored in the effect counter storage area 223i described later.

  The details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of defined contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect counter initial value table 222c, ten patterns (table Nos. 1 to 10) of combinations of 100 random number values (array Nos. 1 to 100) are defined. In the present embodiment, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on power on, No. 1 is performed. One of the tables 1-10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  No. In acquiring any of the tables 1 to 10, a table corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, if the last digit of the number of seconds of the power-on time is 1, No. If the table of 1 is acquired and the lower one digit 2 is No. Two tables are acquired. Similarly, if the lower digit is 3 in the same manner, No. No. 3 table, if the last digit is 4, no. Table 4 if the last digit is 0, ..., No. Ten tables are selected. As a result, since it is possible to set a combination of different random number values each time as the initial value according to the timing of turning on the power, the type can be determined more randomly when deciding (selecting) the advance presentation effect.

  The number of tables and the number of arrays of each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be fifteen or five. The number of sequences may be 150, or may be 50.

  Further, the method of selecting a table according to the current time is not limited to the one described above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of millisecond of the power on time. As a result, even when power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines, it is possible to make the tables selected in each gaming machine different (set random values in each gaming machine).

  Although the table is selected according to the current time clocked by the RTC 292 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be selected according to the measurement results (temperature, humidity, light intensity, volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or may be selected by combining those measurement results. Further, the selection may be made based on the random number value generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number value may be generated by software processing and selected based on the random number value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 65B, the RAM 223 in the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. There is.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing the effect counter value (effect random number value) used when determining (selecting) the advance notice effect from the advance notice effect selection table 222b, and takes the acquisition pointer 223j described later. It consists of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. In each storage area, one random value (rendering effect random number value) used to determine the type of advance notice effect is stored. As for the random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 each time one random value is used for the selection of the advance effect. The acquired random number value is overwritten on the storage area in which the random number value used for the selection of the notice effect is stored (see S4305 in FIG. 69). Thus, the effect counter storage area 223i can maintain the state where 100 random number values generated at different timings are stored.

  The acquisition pointer 223 j is a pointer indicating which one of the 100 random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223 i is to be selected. When selecting the type of the notice effect, the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, the effect random number is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the judgment value defined in the notice effect selection table 222b The type of the notice effect is determined based on (random number value). The value of the acquisition pointer 223 j is updated by one each time the random number value of 1 is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223 i in order to determine the type of the preview effect. As a result, the effect random number can be made more random.

  The reacquisition flag 223 k is a flag indicating whether the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, the range of “250 to 255”). If this re-acquisition flag 223 k is on, it means that the acquired effect random number value is a value corresponding to “re-selection” and it is necessary to acquire the effect random number again from the effect random number generation IC 800 Do. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that there is no need to re-acquire the effect random value. The reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (S4304 in FIG. 69). Also, when a value within the range of “0 to 249” is acquired by reacquisition of the effect random number value, it is set to OFF (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 67, start-up processing 3 in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment will be described.

  In the process of S1101 to S1111 of the startup process 3 in the third embodiment, the same process as the process of S1101 to S1111 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 ends, next, time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the acquired time information Then, the combination of the initial value for 100 effect random numbers to be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected from the effect counter initial value table 222c, and stored (set the initial value) in the effect counter initial value table 222c (S1132) ). When the process of S1132 ends, the process proceeds to S1111.

  In this startup process 3, a combination of initial values defined in advance in the ROM 222 is selected and set in the effect counter storage area 223i, whereby one initial value of effect random numbers from the effect random number generation IC 800 The initial value of the effect random number can be determined more quickly than when one is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to shift to a state in which the player can play the game faster.

  Next, main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the respective processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218 are respectively S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1218 to S1218 is executed.

  Further, in the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the present embodiment, when the processing of S1210 is finished, when the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i is updated, it corresponds to "reselect". When the effect random number value is acquired, the effect random number value is acquired again, and reacquisition processing for updating the effect counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1212 and subsequent steps. The details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, advance notice effect selection processing 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment will be described. The preview presentation effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) in place of the preview effect presentation process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for selecting the type of advance notice effect from the effect random number value generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying the display control device 114 of the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the embodiment.

  In the preview effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, of the 100 effect random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect randomization for effect stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j. A numerical value is acquired (S4301). Next, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new effect random number value (S4302), and the acquired register value is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) It is determined whether there is any (S4303).

  When it is determined in the process of S4303 that the acquired register value (rendering effect random number value) is a value corresponding to “re-selection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, re-acquisition of the effect random number value is set (S4304), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4306. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the register value obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 is out of the range of “reselection” (ie, within the range of “0 to 249”) (S4303: No) The acquired register value is stored as a new effect random number value for the storage area (address) corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j in the effect counter storage area 223i (S4305), and the process moves to the process of S4306 Do.

  In the process of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether the value of the acquisition pointer 223j after the update is larger than 100 (S4307). If it is determined in the process of S4307 that the value of the acquired pointer 223j after update is larger than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquired pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4307 that the value of the acquired pointer 223j after update is 100 or less (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4309.

  In the process of S4309, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect for setting the advance notice effect is the fluctuation effect for notifying the big hit (whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit) (S4309), If it is determined that there is (S4309: Yes), based on the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) and the effect random number (effect counter) acquired in the process of S4301 The type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S4309 (S4309: No), the effect random number value for effect acquired in the process of S4301 (see FIG. 11 (c)) Based on the effect counter), the advance notice effect is selected (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S4312), and the process ends.

  Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this reacquisition process (S1261), as described above, when the effect random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is updated last time, the effect random number value corresponding to "reselect" is acquired. This is processing for obtaining the effect random number again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In this reacquisition process (S1261), it is first determined whether the reacquisition flag is 223k on (S4401), and if it is not on (is off) (S4401: No), this process is directly performed Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the reacquisition flag 223k is on (S4401: Yes), a register value (effect random number value) is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S4402). Next, it is determined whether the register value acquired in the process of S4402 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (ie, "250 to 255") (S4403), a value corresponding to "reselection" If it is (S4403: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the acquired register value is out of the range of “reselection” (ie, “0 to 249”) (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read out. The register value (rendering effect random number value) acquired in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to off (S4405), and the process ends.

  By this reacquisition process (S1261), since only the effect random number value outside the range of "reselect" can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i from the effect random number generation IC 800, the effect at the time of advance notice is selected The effect random number value read out from the counter storage area 223i can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming a value corresponding to "re-selection". Therefore, since it is possible to select (determine) any type of advance notice effect (notice effects A to C) by the process of selecting one advance notice effect, the processing time can be shortened.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of effect random number values are stored in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in advance. It is comprised so that the lottery (determination) of advance notice production will be performed using the random number value for produced | generated. By storing a plurality of (100) random number values in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation where random number values are not stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, and therefore the advance notice effect of each time is determined. It is possible to make determination (determination) normally in the processing for Also, every time the stored random number value is used to determine the notice effect, the used random value is discarded, a new random value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800, and the effect counter storage area 223i is overwritten. Is configured. By sequentially overwriting (updating) the content, repeated use of the same random number value can be prevented (suppressed), so that randomness of the effect random number value can be secured.

  In addition, the effect counter storage area 223i is controlled to store only values outside the range of random numbers for which "reselection" is determined (that is, random numbers within the range of "0 to 249"). . By configuring in this way, if one of the predetermined number of random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is acquired, the type of the advance effect is executed only by executing one determination of the advance effect. (That is, any of the notice effects A to C can be determined without determining "re-selection"). Therefore, since the time required for the process for determining the type of the preliminary rendering can be shortened, the type of the preliminary rendering can be surely notified to the display control device 114 by the start timing of the preliminary rendering.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the effect random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222, and the startup processing 3 (see FIG. 67). Among them, a combination of any of the initial values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c is transferred to the effect counter storage area 223i. Further, all of the effect random number values specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values ("0 to 249") within the range of any judgment result (when any of the notice effects A to C is determined) It is specified that it becomes the value in the range). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to shorten the time required to store the initial value in the effect counter storage area 223i as compared to the case where the initial value is acquired one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800. When the initial value is acquired one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800, every time one random value is acquired, it is determined whether or not it is a value corresponding to "reselection", and "reselection" is performed. In the case of the value corresponding to “,” it is necessary to newly acquire the random number value until it becomes a random value within the range (within “0 to 249”) which is one of the determination results. By shortening the time for storing the initial value of the effect random number for a predetermined number (100) in the effect counter storage area 223i, it is possible to shorten the period until the pachinko machine 10 can play a game.

  In the present embodiment, 100 random number values are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, but the number is not limited to 100 and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values (so-called hard random number values) generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Absent. For example, a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random numbers (so-called software random numbers) generated by software processing may be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Generally, software random numbers are incremented by one in software processing. Therefore, when the value of the software random number is acquired again in order to re-lotter the lottery result, it is highly possible that the random number is a value that has not been sufficiently updated. That is, it is not possible to acquire a random value that is a random value. Therefore, by storing random number values in the effect counter storage area 223i in advance as in the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire random number values that become random values even when the lottery result is re-lottery.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, when start winning is detected, various information (various counter values) used for lottery of special symbols is acquired, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 Is detected, it is configured to obtain information (the value of the second random number counter C4) used for the lottery of the normal symbol. That is, different acquisition operations are performed depending on whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, even when the start winning is detected, even when the passage of the through gate 67 is detected, all random number values are acquired collectively, and the detected contents It is configured to use a necessary random number value in accordance with the drawing (determination). The random number value acquisition operation in debugging (operation verification) or the like at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10 by configuring to read the random number values collectively regardless of whether it is a start winning or passing through the through gate 67 Can be checked together.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 are integrated in the main control unit 110. The point electrically connected to the output port 205, the point that the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special drawing random number generation IC 900 for the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and a common drawing random number generation IC 901 And are electrically connected. The special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 are the same as the IC of the same name provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, various counter values in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in the present embodiment, values of respective registers provided in the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the ordinary drawing random number generation IC 901 (first random number register R1, first collision type register R2, stop Random number values (the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, the stop type selection in the first embodiment) for using the type selection register R3, the change type register RS1 and the second hit random number register R4 for various lottery The counter C3 is acquired as the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4), and is stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Also, these counter values are collectively acquired from each IC at the same timing, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

  When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the start winning, the first random number register R1, the first among the stored register values (random number values) The values of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are stored in the free area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when the value of each register is collectively stored in the temporary counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting entry to the through gate 67, the value of the second random number register R4 is normally the symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Stored in the free area of

  Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value, the values (random number values) of all the registers are collectively stored in the temporary counter temporary storage area 203p, whereby any register can be acquired when acquiring the register value. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether the value (random number value) should be acquired by designating, it is possible to quickly store the register value (random number value) in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) or the like at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, acquisition operations of random number values (register values) can be collectively confirmed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203 n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, in place of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided.

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203 n is the continuous number of times the batch acquisition of various register values based on the passage of the through gate 67 is executed (that is, the lottery of the regular symbol is continuously executed without the lottery of the special symbol being executed. Counter for counting the number of times). As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter values (register values) used for the lottery of special symbols and the lottery of normal symbols are configured to be acquired collectively without using acquisition timing. For this reason, the passage of the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily established is intentionally generated, and the first random number (register value) of the acquired random number (register value) There is a possibility that an external analysis of the value of the random number register R1 may be performed. If this fraudulent action is executed, the timing of updating to the register value corresponding to the big hit may be analyzed from the tendency of the register value update in the special figure random number generation IC 900, and there is a possibility that the big hit may be illegally applied. . In order to prevent this fraudulent behavior, in the present embodiment, the number of times the sphere passes continuously through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuity clear counter 203n, and the fraudulentness occurs when the count value becomes a predetermined number of times or more. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of an action and set an error display. In this way, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random value corresponding to the jackpot is acquired, and to prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of awarding the jackpot.

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203 n has an initial value set to 0, and in through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75), of the respective counter values (register values) stored in the temporary counter memory area 203 p, Every time the value of the second random number register R4 is normally stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the value is incremented by one (see S664 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), various counter values (register values) used for lottery of special symbols are initialized to 0 every time they are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (FIG. 74) See S463).

  As described above, the counter temporary storage area 203p is a storage area for temporarily storing register values (random number values) acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901, as described above. The various register values (random number values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p are either corresponding storage areas (special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b) according to the timing when the values are acquired. Transferred to).

Regarding Control Processing of Main Control Device in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described using FIG. 74 and FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 74, the start winning process 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. The start winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the respective processes of S401 to S405 are the same as the respective processes of S401 to S405 of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. Also, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, after the process of S401 is executed, each value of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3 and the second hit random number register R4 is specially selected. The random number generation IC 900 for common use and the random number generation IC 901 for general use drawing are respectively acquired, and are stored in the counter temporary storage area 203 p provided in the RAM 203 (S 461).

  Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, when the process of S405 is completed, the first random number register R1 and the first type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461. Then, each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to the free area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S462). Next, after the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the through gate passing process 4 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 4 in the fourth embodiment. The through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

  In the through gate passing process 4 (S107), in each process of S601 to S604, the same process as each process of S601 to S604 in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is performed. Further, in through gate passing processing 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 in the processing of S601 (S601: Yes), the first hit random number register R1 is The values of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3 and the second hit random number register R4 are acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901, respectively, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. To do (S661).

  Further, in the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 ends, the second random number register R4 among the various register values stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S661. The value of is stored in the first area of the free space holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S662). Then, each register value stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is not 10 or more (S665: No), this processing ends. If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666), and this processing is ended.

  In this manner, by configuring to notify an error when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed ten times or more continuously, among the register values acquired collectively by passing through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In the first case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an illegal act of analyzing the value of the random number register R1. More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter values (register values) used for lottery of special symbols and lottery of normal symbols are configured to be acquired collectively without using acquisition timing. . For this reason, the passage of the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily established is intentionally generated, and the first random number (register value) of the acquired random number (register value) There is a possibility that an external analysis of the value of the random number register R1 may be performed. If this fraudulent action is executed, the timing of updating to the register value corresponding to the big hit may be analyzed from the tendency of the register value update in the special figure random number generation IC 900, and there is a possibility that the big hit may be illegally applied. . In order to prevent this fraudulent behavior, in the present embodiment, the number of times the sphere passes continuously through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuity clear counter 203n, and the fraudulentness occurs when the count value becomes a predetermined number of times or more. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of an action and set an error display. In this way, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random value corresponding to the jackpot is acquired, and to prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of awarding the jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all the register values (random number values) are collectively determined, even when the start winning is detected and when the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. It is configured to be acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, and transferred to a storage area (one of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b) according to the detection content. . Regardless of when the register value (random number value) is acquired, all register values (random number values) are collectively stored in the temporary counter memory area 203p so that the register value can be acquired at any time. Since the process of determining whether a value (random number value) should be acquired by designating a register can be omitted, the register value (random number value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) or the like at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the acquisition operation of the register value (random number value) can be collectively confirmed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 19) executed at a specific trigger of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the start winning of the gaming ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are performed. It is detected. Then, when the start winning is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and random number generation IC 901 for general drawing) is acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74). If it is detected that the pass of the random number generation IC is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC is acquired in the through gate pass processing 4 (see FIG. 75). Here, as each register value in each random number generation IC, the random value stored in the frequency of 10 μs twice (period of 200 kHz) is updated. The update interval (time) is obtained by acquiring the register value (random number value) of each random number generation IC in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), and then each random number generation IC in the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75). Is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random number value) of is acquired. Thereby, even in the case where the start winning game of the gaming ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected in the same timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), the register values obtained based on the start winning each ((1) The random number value) and the register value (random number value) obtained based on the passage of the through gate 67 can be made different.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC is used in which the random number values stored at a frequency of 2 times (period of 200 kHz) are updated to 10 μs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC capable of updating the random number value may be used at the timing of acquiring the random number value from the main control device 110. That is, a random number generation IC capable of generating a random number value updated at an arbitrary timing may be used. As a result, the frequency of updating and generating the random value can be minimized, and power consumption can be reduced. Further, it is natural that the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901 may use random number generation ICs having different update timings. For example, the special drawing random number generation IC 900 is updated at a frequency of once every 1 μs (period of 1 MHz), and the random number generation IC 901 for common drawing is updated at a frequency of once every 2 μs (period of 500 kHz) It may be

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and the random number generation IC 901 for general drawing are used as the random number generation IC, and the generated random number values can be acquired collectively. It is not limited to two types. The random number generation IC may be more than three types or one type. For example, one random number generation IC is used, that is, one random number generation IC is combined. Thereby, in the process of acquiring each random number value from the random number generation IC in a batch, each random number value can be obtained only by accessing one random number generation IC, compared to acquiring each random number value from the plurality of random number generation ICs. It can be acquired in a batch, and processing load can be reduced.

Modification of Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the random number for special drawing when the acquisition condition of the random value (register value) is satisfied in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75). It was configured to collectively acquire all the random number values (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the random number generation IC 901 for common drawing.

  In addition to this, in the present modification, when the random number value acquisition condition is satisfied, the random number value (register value) is acquired and the random number value is stored in the same one process (winning process). Is configured as. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only the process 1 (winning process), so that the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. Also, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 have been made, the random number value acquired in the process 1 (winning process) Since a random number value corresponding to each can be stored using a register value, processing load can be reduced.

<About control processing of main controller in modification of fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 76, the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The same parts as those of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the timer interrupt process 5, similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) of the first embodiment described above, the switch read process of S101 is first executed, and then the winning process is executed (SS161). Next, special symbol variation processing is executed (S104), normal symbol variation processing is executed (S106), launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed. (S109), the timer interrupt process 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a winning process (161) which is one process of the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a winning process (S161) according to a modification of the fourth embodiment.

  This winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 76), and determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning) or the passing through the through gate 67. When winning or passing occurs, various random number values are acquired at once from each random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special drawing and random number generation IC 901 for general drawing), and the first entry is made using these various random number values. The processing for executing the processing corresponding to the winning on the ball mouth 64 (starting winning) and the passage to the through gate 67. When the start winning of the gaming ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76) by the winning process (S161), the start winning and the passage of the through gate 67 The processing load can be reduced compared to the case where each register value (random number value) is acquired from each random number generation IC based on that.

  When the winning process is executed, it is first determined whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball entrance 64 or has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), the present process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 5.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry ball slot 64 or passed through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first hit random number register R1, the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3 The respective values of the second random number register R4 are acquired from the special drawing random number generation IC 900 and the common drawing random number generation IC 901, and are stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether the ball has won the first ball entry (S4503). If the ball has not won the first ball entry (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4508 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S4505).

  Then, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S4503: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a ball holding number command indicating the value of special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S4507), and the first random number register R1 stored in counter temporary storage area 203p in the processing of S4501, the first Each value of the type register R2 and stop type register R3 is stored in the first area of the vacant reserved areas (pended first area to reserved fourth area) of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a (S4508), and Transfer to processing. In the processing of S4508, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S4509, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S4509). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S4511).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S4509: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4511) : No), the process proceeds to the process of S4514. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S4509: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S4512). Then, in the process of S4502, the value of the second hit random number register R4 stored in the temporary counter storage area 203p is set as the free storage area of the normal symbol storage ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (storage 1st area to storage 4th area) Are stored in the first area (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and then the process ends.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when the acquisition condition of the random number value is satisfied, the acquisition of the random value (register value) in the same one process (winning process) and the random number value It is configured to store and execute. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only the process 1 (winning process), so that the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. Also, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 have been made, the random number value acquired in the process 1 (winning process) Since a random number value corresponding to each can be stored using a register value, processing load can be reduced.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. In the first embodiment described above, when the advance notice effect is selected from the advance notice effect selection table 222 b, “re-selection” is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, "reselection" can be determined. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main control device 110 is the super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the "re-selection" is determined is made different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a jackpot. And when determining the production | presentation aspect of super reach, it is comprised so that the production | presentation of a different aspect may be performed according to the frequency | count by which "re-selection" was determined continuously. As a result, it is possible to predict whether a jackpot or a jackpot is to be made according to the effect mode at the time of super reach, so that the player can be focused on the effect. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed The point is that the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is modified from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 78A, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment is provided with a pseudo variation complementation effect selection table 222d in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This pseudo variation complementation effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines the mode of the pseudo variation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the super reach having the variation time of 60 seconds is notified by the variation pattern command. It is. In addition, the notice effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is eliminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the RAM 223 of this embodiment, a fluctuation reselection flag 223m and a fluctuation reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and a notice reselection flag 223e and the notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

  The variation reselection flag 223 m is a flag indicating whether “reselection” has been determined from the super reach selection table 222 a 3. If this variation reselection flag 223m is on, it means that "reselection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 (the type (mode) of super reach is not determined), and if off, It means that "re-selection" has not been determined (the type (mode) of super reach has been determined). The variation reselection flag 223m has its initial value set to off, and "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3 in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach. If it is turned on, it is set to on (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, if any of the types of super reach (super reach types A to C) is determined in the variation reselection process (see FIG. 84), it is set to off (see S5110 in FIG. 84). By referring to the fluctuation reselection flag 223m, when “reselection” is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3, the super reach type is reselected (reselected) in the fluctuation reselection process (see FIG. 84). Lottery) can be performed.

  The fluctuation reselection counter 223 n is a counter for counting the number of times of the process of reselecting the type of the fluctuation effect (re-lottery). That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times "re-selection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 until the type of the variation pattern is determined after receiving the variation pattern command. As described above, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern of a different aspect is set in accordance with the number of times "reselection" is determined. The number of times "reselection" is determined is determined by the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The fluctuation reselection counter 223 n is incremented by one each time the fluctuation reselection process is executed (see S 5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when one of the variation pattern modes is selected in the variation reselection process, it is initialized to 0 (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (d). First, FIG. 79 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present embodiment displays the variation pattern display mode when the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 is a command indicating complete removal. The normal reach selection table 222a1 for selecting, the normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the change pattern when the normal reach is notified by the change pattern command, and the super reach are notified by the change pattern command And a special reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and a special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern when the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 (b) to 79 (d), the details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a to be referred to when notified of a hit super reach is referred to as the super reach selection table 222a3, and referred to when an off super reach is notified. It is composed of a release super reach selection table 222a 3 b. In each table, variation pattern types (super reach types A to C) are defined in association with values of effect random numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 79C, in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a 3a, the super reach type A is associated with the range of “0 to 60” for the effect random number value, and the range of “61 to 120”. The super reach type B is associated with the super reach type C, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “121 to 180”. In addition, “reselection” is associated with the remaining “181 to 255” range. Assuming that any super reach type is distributed to the entire range of effect random number values “0 to 255”, the ratio of each super reach type is, for example, 3 due to the restriction of the number of effect random numbers. It can not be equally distributed to types of types (make 1: 1: 1). That is, the ratio of each super reach type can not be set freely.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, 60 random number values for determining the super reach types A to C are set, and the remaining random number values are allocated to "reselect" to obtain super reach types A to C respectively. Can be made equal (the selection ratio of super reach types A to C is 1: 1: 1).

  The selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1: 1: 1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined radix and distributing the effect random number values of multiples thereof to the respective super reach types. For example, it is assumed that 30 is set as a predetermined cardinality, and super reach type A: super reach type B: super reach type C = 1: 2: 4 is set as a selection ratio. In this case, 30 (30 × 1) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type A, and 60 (30 × 2) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type B. It is sufficient to allocate 120 (30 × 4) effect random number values to the reach type C. In addition, the remaining 46 (256-30-60-120) effect random number values may be allocated to "re-selection". By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the selection ratio as set (that is, 1: 2: 4) without generating fractions.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), in the out-reach super reach selection table 222a 3b, the super reach type A is associated with the range of “0 to 80” for the effect random number value, and the range of “81 to 160” Super reach type B is associated with, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “161 to 240”. In addition, “re-selection” is associated with the remaining “241 to 255” range. That is, 80 random numbers for effect are allocated to each super reach type. As a result, as in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a 3a, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly 1: 1: 1.

  The out-reach super reach selection table 222 a 3 b is configured to have a lower probability of determining “re-selection” (at the time of jackpot: 76/256, at the time of outcoming: 16/256). Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute an effect with a high expectation of the jackpot so that “reselection” is determined continuously. Therefore, if "re-selection" becomes easy to be selected despite the detachment, the player is likely to be dissatisfied with the situation in which the detachment is finally notified despite the effect having a high degree of expectation being executed. There is a risk that you may have it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability that "re-selection" is determined in the case of outfall is lowered compared to the case of becoming a big hit, and in the case of outfall, the player has an excessive sense of expectation. To prevent (suppress) This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the details of the above-described pseudo variation supplementary effect selection table 222d will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the pseudo variation supplementary effect selection table 222d is constituted at least by the jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 and the out-of-point complementary effect selection table 222d2. The pseudo variation supplementary effect selection table 222 d is a data table for determining a display mode of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of variation of the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach.

  In the present embodiment, when “re-selection” is determined in the case of selecting a 60-second variation presentation mode corresponding to super reach, a pseudo variation presentation of 15 seconds (after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, “3 The display effect to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the main symbols with the numbers “4” and “1” (the so-called chance eyes) is set. The pseudo variation complementation effect selection table 222 d is a data table for selecting a display mode after the pseudo variation display of 15 seconds is finished.

  The jackpot complementary presentation selection table 222d1 is a data that defines the number of times of pseudo change display displayed in a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of change of the hit super reach in association with the number of determinations of "re-selection" It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times "re-selection" is continuously determined is within the range of "0 to 3" until the aspect of the hit super reach is determined from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a 3a. If this is the case, the complementary rendering A is set as the display mode at the time of super reach. In this supplementary effect A, the pseudo variable display (the pseudo stop) is not performed even once between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change, and the variable display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is finally displayed is executed. Is an aspect that That is, a total of two fluctuation displays of the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed are executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Ru.

  In addition, in the range of “4 to 6” in which the number of determinations of “reselection” is “4 to 6”, the complementary effect B in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected And the number of times of determination of "re-selection" is "7 to 9", the complementary effect C in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected In the range where the number of times of determination of “re-selection” is “10 or more”, the complementary effect D in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed three times between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected Ru.

  As described above, the hit super reach has a higher probability of being "reselected" when determining the type of super reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times the pseudo variable display (pseudo stop) is performed increases as "reselection" is determined continuously. Therefore, since the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the player can be increased as the number of times of execution of the pseudo change display (the pseudo stop) increases, attention can be paid to the number of times of execution of the pseudo change display (the pseudo stop). it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  The data for out-of-page complementation effect selection table 222 d 2 is data that defines the number of times of pseudo-variation display displayed in a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation of out-of-range super reach in association with the number of determinations of “reselection” It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the number of times "re-selection" is determined continuously is within the range of "0 to 3" until the mode of the off-super reach is determined from the off-super reach selection table 222a 3b. If it exists, the pseudo change display (the pseudo stop) is not performed even once between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change, and the complement display is executed in which the symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. A is selected. That is, it is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and a total of two fluctuation displays of the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance is stopped and displayed and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the out is displayed are stopped Ru.

  In addition, in the range of “4 to 6” in which the number of determinations of “reselection” is “4 to 6”, the complementary effect B in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected In the range where the number of determinations of "re-selection" is "7 or more", a complementary effect C is selected in which pseudo variable display (pseudo stop) is performed twice between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change. Ru. That is, in an out-of-order super reach, the sum of the pseudo fluctuation display performed in 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation and the pseudo fluctuation display performed in a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds ) Is configured to be up to three times (one less than the upper limit number of hits per super reach). Therefore, since it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit when the chance is displayed four times in 1 super reach, the player is made to pay attention to the number of times of the pseudo change display (the number of times the chance is displayed). be able to. Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 81, main processing 6 (see FIG. 81) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described.

  Steps S1201 to S1210, S1212 and S1212 of the main process (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment in the respective processes of S1201 to S1210, S1212 and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment. The same processes as those in steps S1214 to S1218 are executed. Further, in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S1210 is ended, next, “reselection” is determined in the selection processing of the mode of the previous super reach, the disturbance for effect A numerical value is newly acquired, and a variation reselection process for selecting a super reach mode is executed again (S1291), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of the variation reselection process (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 84) in the present embodiment, after the command determination processing (S1212) is executed, the variable display setting processing 6 is executed (S1213), and the processing is shifted to S1214 and subsequent steps. The variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of the variation display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned variation display setting process 6 (S1213). This fluctuation display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation effect as in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. It is the processing which sets up the fluctuation pattern command for display on the basis of the fluctuation pattern command which is done.

  Of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410 respectively include S1401 to S1405 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those in steps S1407 to S1410 are executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1403 is finished, next, the detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) extracted in the process of S1403. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1404 and subsequent steps. The details of the variation pattern selection process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1431) described above. By this variation pattern selection process (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a effect random number value (S5001). Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1403 of the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 82) is a variation pattern of super reach (S5002).

  If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the fluctuation pattern notified by the current fluctuation pattern command is not the super reach in the process of S5002 (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted fluctuation type is displayed in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. The display mode of the fluctuation pattern is determined (selected) based on the selected table and the selected table and the random number for effect acquired in the process of S5001 (S5004), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that it is a variation pattern of super reach (S5002: Yes), the effect random number value acquired by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, The mode of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the random value is determined (selected) (S5003). As described above, if the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a hit super reach, the jackpot super reach selection table 222a 3a is compared with the effect random number value. On the other hand, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the out-of-order super reach, the out-of-place super reach selection table 222a 3 b is compared with the effect random number value.

  When the process of S5003 is completed, it is determined whether or not it is "re-selected" that is determined (selected) from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a or the disconnection super reach selection table 222a3b (S5005), and "reselection" is performed. (S5005: Yes), select a pseudo-variation pattern (a pseudo-variation display for 15 seconds which is stopped and displayed at a chance) which is executed in 15 seconds from the start of the variation (S5006), The reselection flag 223m is set to on (S5007), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the "re-selection" is not determined (selected) from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a or the disconnection super reach selection table 222a3b (S5005: No) A mode (a mode of long super reach) in which the pseudo variable display is not executed but the 60 seconds variable display is selected (decided) as the display mode of the current fluctuation pattern (S5008), and the process is ended. .

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after receiving the variation pattern command, the variation patterns to be selected are made different depending on whether “reselection” is determined at the time of selection of the aspect of the first variation pattern. (An aspect of a 15 second pseudo fluctuation pattern or an aspect of a 60 second long super reach). If “re-selection” is selected, setting a short pseudo fluctuation pattern of 15 seconds allows the aspect of the fluctuation pattern to be reliably determined (selected) during the 15 seconds. When "reselection" is selected, the fluctuation reselection processing (S1291) which is repeated until the aspect of the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed every one millisecond in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 81). Therefore, even if reselection is repeated up to 15,000 times in 15 seconds, the variation pattern can be selected. Then, the probability that "re-selection" is determined is 76/256 in the case of the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, and 16/256 in the case of the outlier super reach selection table 222a3b. For this reason, the probability that "reselection" is determined 5000 consecutive times is about 1 / 2.5 x 10 7911 power even in the case of a jackpot with a high probability, and the probability is statistically negligible. . Therefore, by setting the mode of the pseudo variation pattern of 5 seconds when "reselection" is determined, it is possible to secure time for executing the process of reselecting the mode of the variation pattern. In addition, make the pseudo fluctuation production for 15 seconds the same mode as the pseudo fluctuation production that may be executed in 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation (a mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed). By this, it is possible to set the start of the effect that the chance eyes are continuously displayed.

  Next, the details of the variation reselection process (S1291) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variation reselection process (S1291), as described above, when “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the previous super reach mode, the effect random number value is newly acquired and the super reach mode is selected again. It is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In this variation reselection process (S1291), first, it is determined whether or not the variation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101). If it is determined that it is off (S5101), the variation pattern mode is reselected. This means that there is no need to do this, so this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101), the fluctuation pattern in the previous fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) or fluctuation reselection processing (see FIG. 84). Since “re-selection” is decided (selected) when selecting the aspect of, and it means that the aspect of the fluctuation pattern is undecided, first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is newly set as the effect random number value (S5102), and then by adding 1 to the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (S5103), the number of times "reselection" is determined (selected) successively is updated.

  When the process of S5103 ends, next, the random number value for effect newly acquired by the process of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79 (b) to (d)), A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination (selection) result by the process of S5104 is "re-selection" (S5105), and if "re-selection" (S5105: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the “reselected” is not determined (that is, any of the super reach types A to C is determined (selected)) (S5105: No) , The value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n is compared with the pseudo fluctuation complementation effect selection table 222d (refer to FIGS. 80 (a) to (c)), and executed during a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The mode of the effect (pseudo-variation complementary effect) in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed 0 to 3 times by the dynamic change display is selected (S5106).

  When the process of S5106 ends, next, a 20-second super reach aspect (short super reach aspect) corresponding to the selected type of pseudo variation supplement effect is selected (S5107). In this short super reach, in the case of the off super reach, the combination of the stop symbols which finally show the off is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the hit super reach, the stop symbols which finally show the big hit are stopped and displayed. In addition, the aspect of this short super reach is started from the state during symbol variation. In accordance with this, in each of the pseudo variation supplementary effects (complement effects A to D), at the end time of the execution period (at 40 seconds after the start of the change), the state in which the symbol is changing is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching from the pseudo variation complementation effect to the short super reach mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling discomfort in the display mode at the time of super reach, and to play the game with ease.

  After the process of S5107, a display variation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of the pseudo variation complementation effect selected in the process of S5106 and the mode of the short super reach selected in the process of S5107 After setting (S5108), the fluctuation reselection counter 223n is initialized to 0 (S5109), the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to OFF (S5110), and this processing ends.

  This variation reselection process (S1291) can display variation patterns of different modes according to the number of times of determination of "reselection", so that various effects can be realized. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the aspect of the variation pattern is selected in the voice lamp control device 113, The "reselection" is configured to be determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main control device 110 is the super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the "re-selection" is determined is made different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a jackpot. And when determining the production | presentation aspect of super reach, it is comprised so that the production | presentation of a different aspect may be performed according to the frequency | count by which "re-selection" was determined continuously. As a result, it is possible to predict whether a jackpot or a jackpot is to be made according to the effect mode at the time of super reach, so that the player can be focused on the effect. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “re-selection” is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds is set. This makes it possible to reliably determine (select) the aspect of the fluctuation pattern in the 15 seconds. Furthermore, since this 15-second effect is set to the same series of effects as the pseudo variation supplementary effect set after the lapse of the period, the 15 second effect and the subsequent pseudo variation complementary effect are mutually associated with each other. Can be displayed. Therefore, since the player's interest can be attracted to the content of the effect, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, one pseudo fluctuation display is performed in the first 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation when “reselection” is determined, but the pseudo fluctuation display is It is not limited to one time, and may be performed twice or more.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the pseudo | simulation fluctuation production (the frequency | count of a display of a chance eye | curd) was made into 4 times at the maximum, the frequency | count of a display can determine the arbitrary times.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Note that each of the above-described embodiments, each control example, or part of them may be combined. Furthermore, although it comprised with several control apparatus, you may comprise with one integrated control apparatus or several integrated control apparatuses.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (re-lottery to become an integer ratio)
The generation means capable of updating and generating the judgment value within a predetermined range, the acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value generated by the generation means, and the setting in which the judgment value acquired by the acquisition means is predetermined A gaming machine comprising: determining means for determining whether the value matches the value; and control means for performing processing set corresponding to the set value when it is determined that the value matches the setting value. When it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the setting value, the acquisition unit acquires the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The number of acquisition control means for controlling the means and the number set in the specific determination value is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. Said Gaming machine A1, wherein the ratio of the number set in the value is one that is set to be an integer.

  Here, for example, gaming machines are known that execute various types of lottery such as lottery of whether or not hit based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, lottery of the aspect of display effect, and the like. In such a lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches the predetermined set value, and when the determination value matches the set value, it corresponds to the set value. There is a case where the processing set as above (determination of the aspect of the effect, etc.) is executed (for example, JP-A-2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of predetermined setting values to the number of possible determination values (that is, the probability of various lottery results) becomes a fraction or a decimal, and if converted to a percentage, the fraction ) Was usually generated. That is, the probability (percentage) of various lottery results could not be integerized. However, in the development stage of gaming machines, it is common to design the percentage to be obtained as a result of each lottery with a percentage (percentage). For this reason, when the designer distributes the number of setting values to be various lottery results in the development stage of the gaming machine, the probability of each lottery result designed with a percentage (percentage) and each determination value according to the percentage There is a risk that the designer may not intuitively understand the correspondence relationship with the number. That is, the design may be inefficient.

  In addition, when publicizing the probability (proportion) that each lottery result will be, in many cases, it is common to publicize a numerical value converted to a percentage, but if a fraction (below the decimal point) occurs in the percentage, Depending on the method of rounding off the decimal point, the sum of proportions may not reach 100%, which may cause the player to have a confusing expression.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation means is acquired The acquisition control means controls the acquisition means. Here, the number set in the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set in the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  As a result, the ratio of the number of items set in the set value can be made intuitively easy to understand, so that the design can be efficiently performed at the development stage of the gaming machine. In addition, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set to the setting value can be set to a more easily understandable value for the player. That is, there is an effect that the setting value can be set suitably.

  A game machine A2 characterized in that the generation means in the game machine A1 updates the determination value in a short period of time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generating means in a short period of time than the shortest interval for acquiring the determination value by the acquiring means. It is possible to suppress that the same determination value is acquired a plurality of times by the acquisition unit before it is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a biased result.

  A plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, and one or more setting values are respectively set in each of the control processes executable by the control means. A game machine A3 which is assigned and the control means executes the control process corresponding to the setting value determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means. One or more set values are allocated to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means. Then, control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means is executed by the control means.

  As a result, different control processes can be executed according to the determination result of the determination means, so that various kinds of control processes can be performed.

  The number of setting values allocated to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means in the gaming machine A3 corresponds to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A game machine A4 characterized in that the ratio is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the number of setting values allocated to each of the control processes executable by the control means is set to the number of judgment values in a predetermined range and the specific judgment value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference with the number is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently at the development stage of the gaming machine. In addition, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set to the setting value can be set to a more easily understandable value for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be the specific determination value continuously without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means. A game machine A5 comprising: a number counting means for counting the number of times and a determination end means for ending the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the number counting means has become a specific number.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be a specific determination value continuously without being determined to match the preset value determined by the determination means is counted by the number counting means, and the number is counted Based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the means has become the specific number, the discrimination by the discrimination means is ended by the discrimination end means.

  As a result, the determination value continues to be determined as a specific determination value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the inability to execute other control processing during that time.

  A game machine A6 comprising execution control means for causing the control means to execute specific control when the judgment by the judgment means is ended by the judgment termination means in the game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the execution control means causes the control means to execute specific control when the determination by the determination means is ended by the determination end means, so There is an effect that control can be performed normally even when the determination is finished without the determination value not matching the set value.

  The number set as the specific determination value in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is the difference with respect to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set as the specific determination value. A game machine A7 characterized in that the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set in the specific determination value is set to the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value Since the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation with respect to the number difference, an effect is achieved that design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine There is. In addition, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set to the setting value can be set to a more easily understandable value for the player.

  The control means comprises display means for displaying a display effect in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7 and effect execution means for executing the display effect in the display means, and the control means is for the display effect to be executed by the effect execution means A game machine A8 characterized in that a type set corresponding to the set value is selected as the type.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, for the display means for displaying the display effect, the display effect is executed by the effect executing means. As the type of display effect executed by the effect execution means, the type set corresponding to the setting value by the control means is selected.

  As a result, there is an effect that the rate at which the display effect is selected can be made a value that the player can easily understand.

  The acquisition control means is provided with a plurality of control means for repeatedly executing a plurality of control processes including discrimination by the discrimination means according to a predetermined control procedure in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the determination value acquired by the acquisition means When it is determined that the specific determination value is different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit after performing another control process based on the predetermined control procedure A game machine A9 characterized in that the acquisition means is controlled to acquire the information.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of control processes including discrimination by the discrimination means are repeatedly executed by the plural control means in accordance with a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process based on a predetermined control procedure is performed, and then the generation means is newly generated. The acquisition control unit controls the acquisition unit to acquire the determined determination value.

  Thereby, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress acquisition of a new determination value without executing other control processing, and thus delaying the other control processing. It has the effect of being able to execute normally without it.

<Feature B group> (on the sub side, start of pseudo fluctuation based on the passage of a fixed interval)
A main control means for executing game control and a peripheral control means for executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means having a judgment value within a predetermined range Storage means for storing determination value information based on an acquisition means for acquiring the determination value and generation means for acquiring the determination value based on establishment of acquisition conditions from the generation means and the generation means updated and generated And, when the determination value information is stored in the storage unit, a number information signal generation unit that generates a number information signal indicating the number of the stored determination value information and the determination value information acquired from the acquisition unit Dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the display means dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means and the determination result of the determination means based on establishment of the start condition and the dynamic display period Period information signal generating means for generating a period information signal indicating a dynamic display period determined by the determining means, and a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means The peripheral control means causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information during the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal. After the dynamic display of the identification information is finished, when the predetermined period which has been determined in advance has elapsed, the motion of the effect pattern is displayed on the display means on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. A game machine B1 having an effect symbol dynamic display means for starting an intentional display.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine in which the variable effect is started based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. The fluctuation effect is started promptly (for example, within one second) after the winning if the winning is not held, and immediately after the ending of the fluctuation based on the winning immediately before the holding if the winning is held. For example, it is normal to start in less than one second) (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2009-050734). In such a gaming machine, if the instruction to start the fluctuation effect is delayed and the fluctuation effect is not started promptly, the player will be given an impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally, and the player will be asked There was a risk of distrust.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display execution means indicates the identification information dynamically by the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal. After the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, when the predetermined period which has been determined in advance has elapsed, the effect is displayed on the display means by the effect symbol dynamic display means on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. Dynamic display of the symbol is started.

  Thereby, when a predetermined period passes without receiving a period information signal, it can be recognized that it is operating normally by dynamic display of a production design. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being distrusted.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means corresponds to the setting value when it is determined by the determining means that the determination value acquired by the acquiring means matches the predetermined setting value. The dynamic display period is determined, and the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, and the generation means newly generates the determination value. The acquisition control means for controlling the acquisition means so as to acquire the determination value generated on the basis of the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination A gaming machine B2 characterized in that a ratio of the number set to the set value is an integer with respect to a difference from the number set to the value.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the determination unit that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit matches the predetermined setting value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. Here, when the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the setting value, the generation means acquires the determination value newly generated by the generation means. The means is controlled by the acquisition control means. And the number set as the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set as the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set as the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  This makes it possible to set the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined to an integer, so that the design can be efficiently performed when designing the ratio of the dynamic display period in the development stage of the gaming machine. There is. In addition, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be made more easily understandable to the player.

  A plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means in the gaming machine B1 or 2, and the dynamic display period determining means can determine the dynamic display period. One or more setting values are allocated to each of the display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value determined by the determining means. A game machine B3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means. Then, one or more setting values are allocated to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value determined by the determination means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means.

  Thus, different dynamic display periods can be determined in accordance with the setting value determined by the determination means, so that the determined dynamic display period can be various. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B3, the number of setting values allocated to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that a ratio to a difference with the number set in is an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the number of setting values allocated to each of the dynamic display periods which can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of judgment values within a predetermined range. Since the ratio with respect to the difference between the and the number set in the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio for determining each dynamic display period can be set to an integer. Therefore, when designing the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the gaming machine, there is an effect that the design can be performed efficiently. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to set the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined to a more easily understandable value for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbols is started by the effect symbol dynamic display means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by comprising notification mode setting means for setting a specific notification mode in the case where it is determined.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, period information even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the rendering symbol is started by the rendering symbol dynamic display component in the peripheral control component. Since the specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means when no signal is received, the player or the clerk in the hall recognizes that the period information signal is not received for the specific period according to the specific notification mode. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine B5, the specific period is a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal, so that the period information signal can not be received. It is possible to prevent the continuous display from being continued. Therefore, it is effective in the ability to alert | report the defect of a period information signal earlier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set in the specific determination value is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the percentage of the number set to the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set in the specific determination value is set to the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value When the percentage of the dynamic display period is designed in the development stage of the gaming machine, since the percentage of the number set in the setting value is set to be an integer in percentage notation with respect to the difference between the number and the number There is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. In addition, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be made more easily understandable to the player.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B7, the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value by the determination means. Acquisition of a new determination value by the acquisition control means and determination of the new determination value by the determination means are repeated until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values. A game machine B8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determination means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value. Since acquisition of a new judgment value by the acquisition control means and judgment of the new judgment value by the judgment means are repeated by the main control means until it is judged that the judgment value matches any of the set values. Dynamic display time can be determined with certainty. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the dynamic display is not performed in the peripheral control means.

<Feature C group> (determine effect counter in advance and secure)
Generation means capable of updating and generating a judgment value constituted by values within a predetermined range, and acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value based on the establishment of the first condition from the generation means and the acquisition means Storage means for storing the determination value acquired in the storage means, a determination means for determining the determination value obtained in the acquisition means, and the determination value obtained by the acquisition means by the determination means is a specific determination value If it is determined that the second determination condition is not stored in the storage unit, the acquisition control unit causes the acquisition unit to acquire the newly generated determination value, and the second condition is satisfied. A control process determining means for determining a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage means, the number of the specific determination values being an integral ratio of the execution rate of the control process Is set as Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the at it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be capable of storing the predetermined upper limit number of determination values, and when the upper limit number is exceeded, one of the already stored determination values is overwritten and stored. Gaming machine C2 characterized in that

  A gaming machine C3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first condition is more easily established than the second condition.

  A judgment value defining means for predetermining a predetermined number of the judgment values in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3 and the judgment value provided for the judgment value defining means are supplied to the storage means based on the power supply. A gaming machine C4 comprising storage control means for controlling to store, the predetermined number of determination values being configured other than the specific determination value.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine control process determining means determines one control process from the plurality of control processes, and one or more for each of the plurality of control processes. The determination value is allocated, and the number of determination values allocated to each of the plurality of control processes is the number of determination values that become values within the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A game machine C5 characterized in that a ratio to a difference with the number of the game units is set to be an integer.

  A game machine C6 characterized in that in any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the generation means updates the determination value in a short period of time than a shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

<Feature D group> (if you pull the replay pseudo-link)
The ball entering information acquiring means for acquiring ball entering information based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and the ball entering means, and the front acquired for the ball entering information acquiring means In the case where the discrimination means for performing discrimination and the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means are displayed based on the writing ball information and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means A bonus giving means for giving a benefit to the player, and a generation means capable of generating an updated judgment value within a predetermined range in the gaming machine possessed and the judgment generated by the generation means Acquisition means for acquiring a value, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means by the acquisition means Said judgment When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined based on the determination result and the determination result and the dynamic display mode determination means, the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is specified If the acquisition control means causes the acquisition means to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation means as the determination value and the dynamic display mode of 1 is determined, the specific determination value is acquired Temporary stop display means for temporarily stopping and displaying the identification information at least once during execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the determination value newly acquired after acquisition by the means And a game machine D1 characterized in that

  In the gaming machine D1, when the one dynamic display mode is determined, the temporary stop display means determines the number of times of temporary stop based on the number of times the specific determination value is acquired. A game machine D2 characterized by

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is the specific determination result, a large number of the specific determination values are set.

  In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a specific dynamic display mode determined when the specific determination result and the determination means determine And at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes determined when the determination result is other than the specific determination result, and the determination value is set for each of the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Are allocated in advance and set in advance. A game machine D4.

  The number of the specific determination values in the gaming machine D4 is set such that the ratio at which the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is determined is an integer. Gaming machine D5.

<Feature E group> (Common use of random number acquisition)
The first determination means acquired from the first generation means is the specific first one when the first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range and the first condition are satisfied. Within a first control means and a second control means for executing the first control when it is judged by the first judgment means for judging whether it is the first judgment value and the first judgment means specified by the first judgment means The second determination value acquired from the second generation unit is specified when a second generation unit that generates a second determination value by updating the second determination value with a second condition and a second condition that is different from the first condition is satisfied. A second determination unit that determines whether it is the second determination value and the second control that is different from the first control when the second determination unit determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value Based on the fact that one of the second control means and the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. Te, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a obtaining means for obtaining a more and each of the first judgment value and the second judgment value and said first generating means and the second generating means E1.

  Here, for example, there are gaming machines which draw a special symbol based on winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and perform a lottery of a normal symbol based on passage of the game ball through the through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a drawing of a special symbol is acquired based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening, and a normal symbol is obtained based on passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for an ordinary symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-010910). In this case, the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball has won the start opening or the through gate has passed, and there is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is updated and generated by the first generation means with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination means determines whether the first determination value acquired from the first generation means is a specific first determination value, and the first determination means determines the specific first determination When it is determined that the value is determined, the first control is executed by the first control unit. The second determination value is generated by being updated by the second generation unit with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determination unit determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation unit is a specific second determination value. If it is determined by the second determination unit that the second control unit is the specific second determination value, the second control unit executes the second control different from the first control. Based on the satisfaction of either the first condition or the second condition, the acquisition unit acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation unit and the second generation unit.

  As a result, since the operation of the acquisition means can be made common between the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the complication of the control process. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

  A game machine E2 comprising storage means for storing the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means in the game machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means are stored by the storage means until the predetermined condition is satisfied, so the first determination The determination by the means or the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since it is not necessary to make an immediate determination using each determination value acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the processing order and the like in the control processing.

  The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the judgment of the first judging means or the second judging means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed. A gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, since the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination of the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or the second condition is executed, the predetermined condition is acquired by the acquiring means It can be suppressed that the first determination value or the second determination value is discarded before being used for determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the determination is performed based on the abnormal determination value.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is control for giving a first benefit advantageous to the player, and the second control is more advantageous for the player than the first benefit. [2] A game machine E4 characterized by being a control for giving a benefit.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, control for giving the first benefit advantageous to the player is performed by the first control, and control for giving the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is performed by the second control. To be done.

  As a result, the player can be made to play the game in anticipation of the execution of the first control or the second control, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The first condition is based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means, and includes a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball in any of the game machines E1 to E4 and a passage means through which the game ball can pass. Game machine E5 characterized in that the second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is established based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the ball entering the passage means through which the game ball can enter. Is established.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the trigger for establishing the first condition and the second condition. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control, so that the player's game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest for

  A first detection means for detecting establishment of the first condition in any one of the game machines E1 to E5, a second detection means for detecting establishment of the second condition, and the first detection means and the second detection means When the predetermined condition judgment means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result and the predetermined condition judgment means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control according to the predetermined condition that is satisfied is executed. And a control execution means, game machine E6 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detection means, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determination means, and the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determination means. Control according to the predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control execution means.

  As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined according to the control content of the predetermined control execution means.

  In the gaming machine E6, the counting means counts the number of times the first detection means detects that the first condition is met, and the counting of the counting means is based on the second detection means detecting the satisfaction of the second condition. The predetermined condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the counting result by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the first detection means detects that the first condition is satisfied. Then, the counting result of the counting means is initialized by the initialization means based on detection of the establishment of the second condition by the second detection means. When the counting result by the counting means is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition is continuously detected a predetermined number of times or more without the second condition being satisfied, according to the control content of the predetermined control execution means.

  Third generation means for generating a third determination value based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means in any one of the game machines E1 to E7 and the third generation means Storage control means for storing the generated third determination value in the storage means until the determination of the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed Specific condition determining means for determining establishment of a specific condition based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means, and the specific condition determination means A game machine E8 comprising: specific control execution means for executing control based on the established specific condition when the establishment of the specified condition is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third determination value is generated by the third generation unit based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit, and the third determination value generated by the third generation unit is It is stored in the storage means by the storage control means until the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means, establishment of the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means, and the specific condition determination means is established by the specific condition determination means Is determined, control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control execution means.

  As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, in accordance with the content of the control executed by the specific control execution means.

  In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition judging means is newly generated by the third generation means based on the third judgment value stored in the storage means, the first judgment value and the second judgment value. It is determined that the specific condition is satisfied when the third determination value is different from the third determination value.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8, the third generation means is newly generated based on the third determination value stored in the storage means, the first determination value and the second determination value. Since the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination unit when the third determination value is different, the first generation unit and the second generation are performed according to the contents of control executed by the specific control unit. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether each determination value is properly updated by the means.

  If the first condition is satisfied in any one of the game machines E1 to E9, the determination result of the predetermined determination means for performing the predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage means and the determination result of the predetermined determination means And a notification means for giving a notification based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination unit based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit. Then, notification is performed by the notification unit based on the determination result by the predetermined determination unit.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily know the judgment result of the predetermined judgment according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

  The display means capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine E10; and the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information based on the establishment of the second condition on the display means A gaming machine E11, wherein the notification means displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means while the dynamic display means is executing the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E10, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the establishment of the second condition. Then, during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, the effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means is displayed by the notification means.

  As a result, since it is possible to diversify the display mode during the execution of the dynamic display, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature F group> (collectible twice in one interrupt process)
The first generation means that updates and generates the first determination value with the value in the first range and the second generation means that creates and updates the second determination value with the value in the second range and the game control process are repeated In the gaming machine having an executable control means and an interrupt means capable of interrupting the control process of the game and executing the interrupt process based on a predetermined trigger, the interrupt means satisfies the first condition First acquisition means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively, as one process of the interrupt process based on the above. A second condition that is different from the first condition that is different from the first condition that the first control means performs the first control when it is determined that the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining means is the specific first determination value. Is executed later than the first acquisition means based on the fact that Second acquisition means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value newly updated from the first generation means and the second generation means as one process of the interrupt process; And second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is the specific second determination value. A game machine F1 characterized in that

  Here, for example, there are gaming machines which draw a special symbol based on winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and perform a lottery of a normal symbol based on passage of the game ball through the through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a drawing of a special symbol is acquired based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening, and a normal symbol is obtained based on passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for an ordinary symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-010910). In this case, the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball has won the start opening or the through gate has passed, and there is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, on the basis of the establishment of the first condition in the interrupt means, the first generation means and the second generation means respectively generate the first determination value as one process of the interrupt process. The second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition unit. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is a specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control means. Further, based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, the first generation means and the second generation means are respectively new as one process of the interrupt process acquired later than the first acquisition means. The first determination value and the second determination value updated to are acquired by the second acquisition unit. When it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is a specific second determination value, the second control means executes a second control different from the first control.

  Thereby, since the second acquisition means acquires the newly updated first determination value and the second determination value, an independent determination different from the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition means You can get the value. Therefore, there is an effect that fairness in determining whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value in the second control means can be secured. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second generation means is characterized by updating and generating the second determination value at least between acquisition by the first acquisition means and acquisition by the second acquisition means. Game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation unit at least between acquisition by the first acquisition unit and acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Therefore, the second determination value acquired based on the establishment of the second condition becomes a determination value newly updated and generated after the second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition unit. Therefore, even when the first acquisition unit and the second acquisition unit respectively acquire the first determination value and the second determination value in one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit The value is an independent determination value different from the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition means. As a result, it is possible to ensure fairness in determining whether the second determination value is a specific second determination value in the second control means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interrupt processing, the interrupt means acquires by the first acquisition means and by the second acquisition means A game machine F3 characterized by performing acquisition and execution in the one interruption process.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interruption process, the interruption means acquires the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the first acquisition means Since acquisition by the second acquisition means is executed in one interrupt process, it can be determined whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, and the one interrupt process In the processing, since the first determination value and the second determination value can be obtained based on the satisfaction of the first condition and the second condition, it is possible to obtain the first determination value and the second determination value efficiently. The effect is that it can be done.

  The first control in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3 is a control for giving a first benefit advantageous to the player, and the second control is more advantageous for the player than the first benefit. 2. A game machine F4 characterized by being a control for giving a benefit.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, by the first control, the first benefit advantageous to the player is provided. In addition, the second control provides a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit.

  As a result, the player can be made to play the game in anticipation of the execution of the first control or the second control, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine includes a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball in any of the game machines F1 to F4 and a passing means capable of passing the game ball. The first condition is based on the game ball passing through the passing means. And the second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first condition is established based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means. In addition, the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry means.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the trigger for establishing the first condition and the second condition. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control, so that the player's game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest for

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The game machine Z3 to be characterized. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a variable effect is started based on winning of a gaming ball in a starting opening. The fluctuation effect is started promptly (for example, within one second) after the winning if the winning is not held, and immediately after the ending of the fluctuation based on the winning immediately before the holding if the winning is held. For example, it is normal to start within 1 second (for example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2009-050734).
However, in such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the player may have a sense of distrust if the instruction to start the fluctuation effect is delayed and the fluctuation effect is not started promptly.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from feeling distrust.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes peripheral control means for controlling the game based on the main control means for executing control of the game and the control signal outputted from the main control means. , And the main control means generates generation means for updating and generating the determination value within a predetermined range, and acquisition means for acquiring the determination value based on the establishment of the acquisition condition from the generation means; Storage means in which determination value information based on the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is stored, and the number of pieces of determination value information stored when the determination value information is stored in the storage means Number information signal generation means for generating a number information signal, determination means for determining the determination value information obtained from the acquisition means based on establishment of a start condition, and display identification information indicating a determination result of the determination means Dynamic display on Dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period to be made, period information signal generation means for generating a period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and the display means And a privilege giving means for giving a player an advantageous privilege when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed, and the peripheral control means indicates the received period information signal. Dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means during the dynamic display period, and the storage when a predetermined predetermined period has elapsed after the dynamic display of the identification information is finished Rendering symbol dynamic display means for causing the display means to start dynamic display of the rendering symbol on condition that the determination value information is stored in the means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the dynamic display period determining unit determines that the determination value acquired by the acquiring unit matches the predetermined setting value. The dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined when determined by the means, and the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is different from the set value. An acquisition control unit configured to control the acquisition unit to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit when it is determined that the determination value is The number is set such that the ratio of the number set in the set value is an integer to the difference between the number of the determination value in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. ing.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. One or more setting values are allocated to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit is configured to The dynamic display period corresponding to the determined setting value is determined.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, the number of the set values allocated to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining unit is the predetermined number. The ratio with respect to the difference between the number of the determination values in the range of and the number set in the specific determination value is set to be an integer.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the peripheral control means starts the dynamic display of the effect pattern by the effect symbol dynamic display means. And a notification mode setting unit configured to set a specific notification mode when the period information signal is not received even after the specific period has elapsed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the peripheral control means, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, in the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal. After the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, when the predetermined period which has been determined in advance has elapsed, the effect is displayed on the display means by the effect symbol dynamic display means on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. Dynamic display of the symbol is started.
Thereby, when a predetermined period passes without receiving a period information signal, it can be recognized that it is operating normally by dynamic display of a production design. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being distrusted.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when it is determined by the determination unit that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit matches the predetermined setting value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. Here, when the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the setting value, the generation means acquires the determination value newly generated by the generation means. The means is controlled by the acquisition control means. And the number set as the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set as the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set as the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.
Thus, since the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be an integer, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be intuitively understood as a value.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means. Then, one or more setting values are allocated to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value determined by the determination means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means.
Thus, different dynamic display periods can be determined in accordance with the setting value determined by the determination means, so that the determined dynamic display period can be various. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the number of setting values allocated to each of the dynamic display periods which can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means Since the ratio to the difference between the number of judgment values in a predetermined range and the number set in the specific judgment value is an integer, the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined is It can be an integer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined more intuitively understandable.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display of the produced pattern by the produced pattern dynamic display means Since the specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means when the period information signal is not received even if the specific period has elapsed since the start of the period, the period information signal is specified period according to the specific notification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to make it possible for the player and the store clerk in the hall to recognize that they have not received.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
203a Special map reserve ball storage area (storage means)
900 Special drawing random number generation IC ( update means)
S215 privilege granting means S305, S331 portion of some S307, S309 part S431 acquiring means dynamically display mode decision unit S4206 specific effect execution unit determining means

Claims (2)

Determining means capable of performing the determination;
Updating means capable of updating the counter value within a predetermined range;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring the counter value based on establishment of acquisition conditions;
Storage means for counter value information based on the counter values acquired from the acquisition means is stored,
Based on the counter value information stored in the storage means, wherein a identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means may determine the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display unit dynamically displays Aspect determination means ;
A gaming machine comprising : benefit providing means capable of providing an advantageous benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means .
Acquisition control means capable of controlling the acquisition means to acquire the counter value again when the counter value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific counter value;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a predetermined period has elapsed after dynamic display of the identification information is ended in a state where the counter value information is stored in the storage means And a game machine characterized by having. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

Images